Honda CRV Hybrid Owner’s Manual 2022

Owner’s Manual

2022 CR-V

Hybrid

Honda CRV Hybrid Owner’s Manual 2022 Download

 

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

 

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

 

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Software End User License Agreement

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement.

You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice

This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.

A Few Words About Safety

 

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels – on the vehicle.
Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Safety Headings – such as Important Safety Precautions.
Safety Section – such as Safe Driving.
Instructions – how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information – please

read it carefully.

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The Navigation Manual is available online at owners.honda.com. If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle purchase. To request a copy, visit owners.honda.com.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

Safe Driving P. 41
For Safe Driving P. 42 Seat Belts P. 47 Airbags P. 56

Instrument Panel P. 89
Indicators P. 90 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 126

2 Controls P. 149

Clock P. 150 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 152

Moonroof* P. 185

Seats P. 208 Interior Convenience Items P. 218

2 Features P. 243

Audio System P. 244 Audio System Basic Operation P. 251, 272

Customized Features P. 362, 369 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 395

Driving P. 459
Before Driving P. 460 Towing a Trailer P. 465

Parking Your Vehicle P. 559 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 570

Maintenance P. 577
Before Performing Maintenance P. 578 Maintenance MinderTM P. 581 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 601 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 618

Handling the Unexpected P. 627
Tools P. 628 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 629

Overheating P. 649 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 652

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 664

Information P. 667
Specifications P. 668 Identification Numbers P. 670

Emissions Testing P. 673 Warranty Coverages P. 675

Child Safety P. 72 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 86 Safety Labels P. 87

Tailgate P. 167

Security System P. 178

Windows P. 181

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 186

Mirrors P. 206

Climate Control System P. 235

Audio Error Messages P. 340

General Information on the Audio System P. 345

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 398, 422

Compass* P. 456

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 467

When Driving P. 469

Honda Sensing® P. 503

Braking P. 551

Refueling P. 572

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 575

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 586

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 598

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 606

12-volt Battery P. 615

Remote Transmitter Care P. 617

Cleaning P. 619

Accessories and Modifications P. 624

Handling of the Jack P. 643

Power System Won’t Start P. 644

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 647

Fuses P. 659

Emergency Towing P. 663

Refueling P. 665

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 671

Reporting Safety Defects P. 672

Authorized Manuals P. 678

Customer Service Information P. 679

Contents

Quick Reference Guide P. 6

Safe Driving P. 41

Instrument Panel P. 89

Controls P. 149

Features P. 243

Driving P. 459

Maintenance P. 577

Handling the Unexpected P. 627

Information P. 667

Index P. 681

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

 

❚System Indicators (P90)

❚Gauges (P126)

❚Driver Information Interface (P128)

❚Hazard Warning Button ❚Audio System (P251, 272) ❚Navigation System*

() See the Navigation System Manual

❚Rear Defogger (P201)

❚Heated Door Mirror Button* (P201)

❚Climate Control System (P235)

❚Seat Heater Buttons* (P234)

❚POWER Button (P186)

❚Steering Wheel Adjustments (P205)

(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P490)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button (P545)
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button (P510)
Power Tailgate Button* (P173)
Parking Sensor System Button* (P562)
6

❚Headlights/Turn Signals (P189, 190)

 

❚Fog Lights* (P194)

❚Selector (-) (P 484)

❚ (Display/Information) Button

(P128, 273)

❚Heated Steering Wheel Button* (P233) ❚Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow Buttons (P517)

(TRIP) Knob (P129)

❚Brightness Control (P202)

❚Wipers/Washers (P198)

❚Selector (+) (P 484)

❚Interval Button (P528)

❚Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button

(P534)

❚MAIN Button (P518, 536)

❚Horn (Press an area around

.)

❚Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*

() See the Navigation System Manual

❚Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice

Control Buttons (P398, 422)

❚ENTER Button (P128, 248)

/

/

/

Buttons (P128, 248)

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 7

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

 

Power Window Switches (P182)
Door Mirror Controls (P207)
Master Door Lock Switch (P 165)
Memory Buttons* (P 204)
SET Button* (P 204)
❚Rearview Mirror (P206)

❚Interior Fuse Box (P661)

❚Driver’s Front Airbag

(P59)

❚Passenger’s Front Airbag

(P59)

❚Electric Parking Brake

Switch (P551)

❚Automatic Brake Hold

Button (P555)

❚Glove Box (P220)

❚SPORT Button (P483)

❚ECON Button (P487)

❚EV Button (P14)

❚Shift Buttons (P477)

❚Wireless Charger

*

(P230)

❚Accessory Power Socket

(P229)

❚USB Port(s) (P245)

❚Hood Release Handle (P587)

❚Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P573)

❚Driver’s Pocket

8

Rear Cargo Cover (P227)
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P53)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P80)
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P82)
Ceiling Light (P218)
Side Curtain Airbags (P66)
Seat Belts (P47)
Moonroof Switch* (P185)
Map Lights (P219)
❚Sunglasses Holder (P226)

❚Sun Visors

❚Vanity Mirrors

❚Center Console Box (P221)

❚Front Seat (P208)

❚Side Airbags (P64)

❚USB Ports (On the Back of the Center Console)* (P245)

❚Coat Hook (P224)

❚Grab Handle

❚Rear Seat (P212)

❚LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P77)

❚Cargo Area Lights (P219)

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 9

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚Maintenance Under the Hood (P586)

❚Windshield Wipers (P198, 601)

❚Power Door Mirrors (P207)

❚Side Turn Signal Lights* (P189, 598)

❚Door Lock/Unlock Control (P155)

❚Headlights (P190, 598)

❚Front Turn Signal/Front Side Marker Lights

(P189, 190, 598)

Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P190, 194, 598)
❚Tires (P606, 629)

❚Fog Lights* (P194, 598)

How to Refuel (P573)
❚High-Mount Brake Light (P600)

Rear Wiper (P200, 604)
❚Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P167)

❚Multi-View Rear Camera (P570)

❚Rear License Plate Light (P600)

Tailgate Outer Handle (P174)
Taillights (P599)
Back-Up Lights (P599)
Brake/Taillights (P598)
Rear Turn Signal Lights (P598)
Rear Side Marker Lights (P598)
10

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode Drive)

 

Your SPORT HYBRID i-MMD vehicle uses both an electric motor and a gasoline engine as propulsion sources, with the electric motor receiving electricity from an internal High Voltage battery and/or internal generator. The High Voltage battery is charged from the generator driven by the engine or regenerative braking.

When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two. The system selects which propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it. Under certain circumstances, pressing the EV button can manually enable EV (driven only on electricity) mode.

Energy efficiency
As with a gasoline-powered vehicle, hybrid vehicle fuel efficiency and driving range is most impacted by your driving style. Aggressive acceleration and high-speed driving can easily trigger the system to switch the propulsion source to the gasoline-powered engine.

In addition, heavy climate control system use negatively affects vehicle range and efficiency. Either of these use patterns will more quickly reduce the High Voltage battery’s state of charge.

Battery types
There are two types of batteries used in this vehicle; a standard 12-volt battery that powers the airbags, the interior and exterior lights, and other standard 12-volt systems; and a high voltage battery that is used to power the propulsion motor and recharge the 12-volt battery.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 11

Quick Reference Guide

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS

Gasoline Engine– Runs the generator and under certain conditions, drives the wheels directly.

 

Generator– Starts the engine and generates electric power when driven by the gasoline engine to supply electricity to power the electric motor and/or to charge the High Voltage battery.

Electric Motor– Provides propulsion to drive the wheels in conjunction with the gasoline engine in certain conditions and provides electricity to the High Voltage battery through regenerative braking.

High Voltage Battery– Provides electrical storage and serves as a power source for the electric motor.

Learning about the High Voltage battery’s characteristics will help you get the best handling and maximize the range of your electric vehicle. (P502)

High Voltage Battery Charge Level Indicator– Displays

battery state of charge.

When the indicator:

Displays two or less segments, EV mode is no longer available.
Displays ten segments, battery charge level is full.
High Voltage

Battery

Generator & Electric Motor Gasoline Engine

12

Vehicle Speed

Time

Operating

Electric Vehicle (EV)

Hybrid (HV)

Engine (Direct Drive)

Regeneration

mode

Stopped or driven at low speeds:

Driven in high-load conditions

Driven in high-speed, low-load

The accelerator pedal is released

Only the electric motor

(e.g., when accelerating, going

conditions:

and the vehicle is decelerating.

provides propulsion to the

uphill):

The gasoline engine provides

● The electric motor provides

wheels.

The Electric Motor provides

propulsion to the wheels.

electricity to the High Voltage

Driving state

propulsion to the wheels.

The High Voltage battery

battery through regenerative

The gasoline engine drives the

supplies electricity to the electric

braking.

generator, supplying electricity

motor for added propulsion.

to the electric motor for added

The electric motor provides electricity

propulsion or to the High

to the High Voltage battery through

Voltage battery for charging.

regenerative braking.

Power Flow

Monitor

Electric motor

Stopped/Running

Running

Generating/Running

Regenerating

Generator

Stopped

Generating

No Output

Stopped/No Output

Engine

Stopped

Running

Running

Stopped/No Output

High Voltage

Discharge

Charging/Discharge

Charging/Discharge

Charging

battery

Quick Reference Guide

13

Quick Reference Guide

EV Button

 

EV mode is enabled by pressing the EV button near the shift

button.

The EV mode indicator comes on in the instrument panel when EV mode is enabled.

Press the EV button again to switch back to HV mode.

Some conditions, such as a low High Voltage battery level and a high vehicle speed, may keep the system from manually switching into EV mode. The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface with the button pressed when EV mode is disabled.

Shifts in vehicle, driving, or road conditions may automatically

cancel EV mode and switch back to HV mode.

A message will appear on the driver information interface and EV mode may be canceled automatically when:

The High Voltage battery charge level is low.
Your vehicle speed is too high.
Your vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h) while the engine is in warming-up operation.
You fully depress the accelerator pedal.
You are driving on hilly road.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages (P109)

In EV mode, the acoustic vehicle alerting system is on.

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (P488)
14

Regenerative Energy and Regenerative Braking
When regenerative braking is in operation

Motor

High

Voltage

Battery

Auto Engine Stop/Start
When decelerating without the accelerator being depressed or the brake pedal being applied, or while driving downhill, the electric motor acts as a generator that recovers a portion of the electrical energy that was used to accelerate the vehicle. This regenerative braking slows the vehicle in a manner similar to engine braking in a gasoline-powered vehicle. You can control the rate of deceleration by using the deceleration paddle selector.

 

Quick Reference Guide

Your vehicle’s gasoline engine automatically stops running during vehicle operation or restarts while the vehicle is stationary when it is appropriate.

In the following cases, however, auto engine stop may not activate.

The vehicle momentarily needs additional power for aggressive acceleration, or driving uphill or at high speed.
The climate control system is in heavy use.
The High Voltage battery temperature is high or low.
The High Voltage battery is too low on charge.
Sounds Unique to the SPORT HYBRID i-MMD System
When you first start driving this vehicle, you will likely hear some unfamiliar sounds, particularly when you turn on the power system, or while you are driving or accelerating from a stop. Some of these sounds are unique to this vehicle‘s powertrain, fuel, and climate control systems; others are similar to sounds generated by conventional automobiles that typically are masked by louder noises absent from a vehicle of this design. These sounds are not a cause for concern, and you will soon recognize them as normal and thus be able to detect any new or unusual noise should one develop.

After shutting off the engine, you may hear certain noises coming from the vehicle. Here’s the lowdown:

Noise from Under Vehicle: This noise is caused by the vacuum pump inside the fuel evaporation leakage check module (ELCM). Depending on conditions, the pump will come on for about 15 minutes about 5 to 10 hours after engine shutoff. This noise is just normal vehicle operation and doesn’t indicate a vehicle problem.
15

Safety Precautions

Quick Reference Guide

Do not cover the air intake.

Air Intake

If the air intake is obstructed during vehicle operation, the High Voltage battery can become too hot. To protect the battery, the system may start to limit the battery’s output and cause the power system and 12-volt battery charging system indicators to come on.

Do not touch the High Voltage system

 

Attempting to take a High Voltage system component apart or disconnect one of its wires can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure that any maintenance or repairs to the High Voltage system are performed by a Honda dealer.

If a crash occurs

Be careful of electric shock hazard.
uIf a severe crash damages your vehicle’s High Voltage system, there is a possibility of electrical shock due to exposed High Voltage components or wires. If this happens, do not touch any of the High Voltage system components or any of its orange wires.

Avoid contact with High Voltage battery fluid.
uThe High Voltage battery contains a flammable electrolyte that could leak as a result of a severe crash. Avoid skin or eye contact with the electrolyte as it is corrosive. If you accidentally come into contact with the electrolyte, rinse the exposed skin or flush your eyes with copious amounts of water for at least five minutes, and seek medical attention immediately.

Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.
uAttempting to extinguish an electrical fire with even a small quantity of water, from a garden hose for instance, can be dangerous.

Any time the vehicle is damaged in a crash, have it repaired by a dealer.
16

Emergency Shutdown System for the High Voltage System

If the vehicle is involved in a crash, the emergency shutdown system will activate depending on the severity of the impact. When the system activates, the High Voltage system automatically shuts down, and the vehicle can no longer move under its own power. To return the High Voltage system back to normal operation, consult a dealer.

 

Honda collects and recycles High Voltage batteries used in its vehicles – consult a dealer for more information.

Quick Reference Guide

17

Quick Reference Guide

Eco Assist® System (P487)

 

Ambient Meter

With SPORT mode off, the color of the ambient meter changes to green
to indicate that the vehicle is being

driven in a fuel efficient manner.

ECON Mode Indicator (P102)

Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.

ECON Button (P487)

Helps maximize fuel economy.

18

Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points

Comes on when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
Drive Cycle Score

Lifetime Points

Eco Drive Display (P132)

Keep the vehicle icon near the center of the circle.
Fuel economy is: Worse Better Best Better Worse

Aggressive Deceleration Moderate Slow Acceleration/ Moderate Aggressive Acceleration

Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration

Quick Reference Guide

19

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P41)

 

Airbags (P56)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P72)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Before Driving Checklist (P46)

Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P86)

Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P47)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.

● Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

20

Instrument Panel (P89)

 

Indicators (P 90)/Gauges (P 126)/Driver Information Interface (P 128)

Speedometer (P126)

POWER/CHARGE Gauge

(P126)

High Voltage Battery

Charge Level Gauge

(P127)

Deceleration

Shift Position Indicator/

Driver

Transmission System

Paddle Selector

Information

Indicator (P95)

Indicator

Interface

(P95)

(P128)

Fuel Gauge

(P126)

Quick Reference Guide

21

Quick Reference Guide

Controls (P149)

Clock (P150)

Models with color audio system

a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Adjust Clock.

b Rotate to change hour, then press

.

c Rotate to change minute, then press .

d Select SET, then press .

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Models with Display Audio

 

The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.

You can also adjust the time manually.

a Select the (Home) icon, then select Settings.

b Select Clock, then Clock Adjustment.

c Touch the respective 3 / 4 icon to adjust the hours or minutes up or down.

d Select OK.

POWER Button (P186)

Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode.

22

Turn Signals (P189)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Lights (P190)

Light Control Switches

High Beam

Low Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

 

(P198)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

MIST

OFF

AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies

automatically

INT*2: Low speed with

intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward

you to spray

washer fluid.

Adjustment Ring

(-: Low Sensitivity*1

(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+: High Sensitivity*1

(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2

*1: Models with automatic intermittent wipers

*2: Models without automatic intermittent wipers

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
Steering Wheel (P205)

To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
To adjust

To lock

Lever

Quick Reference Guide

23

Quick Reference Guide

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside

(P163)

Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Tailgate (P167)

 

Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock and open the tailgate when you have the keyless remote on you.
Models with power tailgate

Press the power tailgate button on the driver’s side control panel, or press the remote transmitter to unlock and open the tailgate when you have the keyless remote on you.
Outer Handle

Models with hands free access

Use a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the keyless remote.

1 sec.

24

Power Door Mirrors

(P207)

With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P181)

 

With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Auto-open/close function on driver’s window

Indicator Power Window Lock Button

Window Switch

Auto-open/close function on front windows

Indicator Power Window Lock Button

Window Switches

Quick Reference Guide

25

Quick Reference Guide

Climate Control System (P235)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Models without SYNC button

Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

(Recirculation) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Fan Control Dial

(ON/OFF) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button MODE Control Button

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and dashboard vents, and back of the center console.

Air flows from dashboard vents,

and back of the center console.

26

Models with SYNC button

Fan Control Buttons

Driver’s side Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

(ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Audio/Information Screen

 

(CLIMATE) Button

Passenger’s side Temperature

Control Dial

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and dashboard vents,

and back of the center console.

Air flows from dashboard vents,

and back of the center console.

Quick Reference Guide

27

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P243)

Audio Remote Controls

(P248)

3 / 4 / / Button

(+ / (- Bar

Button

ENTER Button

+ / – Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.

3 / 4 Button
Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio mode as follows:

Models with color audio system

FM1/FM2/AM/USB or iPod/Pandora®/ Bluetooth® Audio

Models with Display Audio

FM/AM/SiriusXM®/USB/iPod/ Bluetooth® Audio/Pandora®/Apps/ Audio Apps

Models with Display Audio

 

ENTER Button
When listening to a USB flash drive
a Press ENTER to display the folder list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.

c Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in that folder.

d Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.

When listening to an iPod
a Press ENTER to display the iPod music list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a category.

c Press ENTER to display a list of items in the category.

d Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.

u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4

repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.

When listening to Pandora®
a Press ENTER to display the station list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then

press ENTER.

When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
a Press ENTER to display the track list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then

press ENTER.

28

/ Button
Radio: Press to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station.

USB device:

Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.

Pandora®:

Press to skip to the next track. Press and hold to select the next or previous station.

(Display/Information) Button: Press to change contents.
2 Driver Information Interface

(P128)

 

Quick Reference Guide

29

Quick Reference Guide

Audio System (P244)

 

Models with color audio system (P251)

Audio/Information Screen

(Day/Night) Button

RADIO Button

(Phone) Button

MEDIA Button

(Sound) Button

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Selector Knob

(Seek/Skip) Button

MENU/CLOCK Button

(Seek/Skip) Button

(Back) Button

Preset Buttons (1-6)

30

Models with Display Audio (P272)

 

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

 

*

Compass Icon*

Quick Reference Guide

(Home) Icon

(Map) Icon*

(Audio) Icon

(Phone) Icon

(Back) Icon

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/ Power Audio) Knob

(Day/Night) Icon

Audio/Information Screen

(Instrument Panel) Icon

* Not available on all models 31

Quick Reference Guide

Driving (P459)

 

Transmission (P476)

Select (P and depress the brake pedal when turning on the power.
Shift selection
READY Indicator

On: You can start to drive.

Shift Position Indicator The shift position indicator

and the shift button

indicator indicate the

current shift selection.

Shift Position Indicator

Park

Press the (P button.

Used when parking or before turning off or starting the power system. Transmission is locked.

Reverse

Press back the (R button.

Used when reversing.

Neutral

Press the (N button.

Transmission is not locked.

Shift Button

Indicator

Drive

Press the (D button.

Used for normal driving.

The deceleration paddle selector can be used temporarily.

The deceleration paddle selector can be used when SPORT mode is on.

32

Deceleration Paddle Selector (P484)

When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration paddle selector situated on the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through four stages of deceleration.

Pull the (+ selector for a few seconds when you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector.

When SPORT mode is OFF
If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change temporarily, and the stage will appear in the instrument panel.

When SPORT mode is ON
If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change and the stage along with M will appear in the instrument panel.

Quick Reference Guide

(- Paddle (+ Paddle

Selector Selector

When SPORT

When SPORT mode is

mode is OFF, the

ON, the deceleration

deceleration

stage and M appear.

stage appears.

Deceleration

stage

33

Quick Reference Guide

VSA® On and Off (P490)

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you turn on the power system.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P493)

Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you turn on the power system.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.
CMBSTM On and Off

(P510)

When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you turn on the power system.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Refueling (P572)

 

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Fuel tank capacity:14 US gal (53 L)

a Pull the fuel fill door release handle.

b After refueling, wait for about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

34

Honda Sensing® (P503)

 

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located in the front grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rear view mirror.

The camera is located

behind the rearview

mirror.

Front Sensor Camera

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is

inside the front grille.

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P506)

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (P517)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and

set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P534)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

(P543)

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

Quick Reference Guide

35

Quick Reference Guide

Maintenance (P577)

 

Under the Hood (P586)

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

Wiper Blades (P601)

fluid. Add when necessary.

● Replace blades if they leave streaks

● Check brake fluid.

across the windshield or become noisy.

● Check the 12-volt battery condition monthly.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

Tires (P606)

Lights (P598)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

Check tire pressures regularly.
Install snow tires for winter driving.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

36

Handling the Unexpected (P627)

 

Flat Tire (P629)

Park in a safe location and repair the flat tire using the tire repair kit in the cargo area.
Power System Won’t

Start (P644)

If the 12-volt battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Overheating (P649)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the power system cool down.
Quick Reference Guide

Indicators Come On

(P652)

Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual.
Blown Fuse (P659)

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Emergency Towing (P663)

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
37

Quick Reference

What to Do If

 

Why does the brake pedal This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a

pulsate slightly when problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

applying the brakes? pump the brake pedal.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P557)

Guide

The rear door cannot be

opened from inside the

vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle.

To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

after I unlocked the doors?

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the

The exterior lights are left on.

driver’s door?

The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

38

Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?

The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes.

 

Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) (P158)
Quick Reference

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are

sound when I start driving?

not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal

parking brake switch does

depressed.

not release the parking

brake. Why?

Depressing the accelerator

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

pedal does not release the

Check if the transmission is in P or N. If so, select any other

parking brake

position.

automatically. Why?

Why do I hear a screeching

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

sound when I apply the

inspected by a dealer.

brake pedal?

Guide

39

Quick Reference

I’m seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.

 

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P493)
Guide

Why does the shift position automatically change to P when I open the driver’s door to check for parking space lines when reversing?

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
Close the driver’s door and manually change the shift
position.

When opening the driver’s door (P480)
40

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Front Airbags (SRS) ……………………….

59

Safety Labels

Important Safety Precautions…………..

42

Side Airbags…………………………………

64

Label Locations …………………………….

87

Important Handling Information………

44

Side Curtain Airbags ……………………..

66

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features…………

45

Airbag System Indicators………………..

68

Safety Checklist ……………………………

46

Airbag Care …………………………………

71

Seat Belts

Child Safety

About Your Seat Belts ……………………

47

Protecting Child Passengers ……………

72

Fastening a Seat Belt ……………………..

51

Safety of Infants and Small Children…….

74

Seat Belt Inspection……………………….

55

Safety of Larger Children ……………….

84

Airbags

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Airbag System Components ……………

56

Carbon Monoxide Gas …………………..

86

Types of Airbags …………………………..

59

41

For Safe Driving

Safe Driving

 

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

 

Some states prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

42

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

 

Safe Driving

43

For Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Safe Driving

 

Important Handling Information

 

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

1Important Handling Information

 

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read:

Precautions While Driving P. 475
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 467
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

44

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

9

8

9

6

10

7

8

10

11

7

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

6

Seat Belts

7

Front Airbags

8

Side Airbags

9

Side Curtain Airbags

10

Door Locks

11

Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

Safe Driving

 

45

For Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving

 

Safety Checklist

 

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 163

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Seats P. 208

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 215

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 51

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 72

1Safety Checklist

 

If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 109
46

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts

 

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 80
1About Your Seat Belts

 

WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states require you to wear seat belts.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 47

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:

All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts

 

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then, refasten the belt.

48

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Reminder
The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts.

 

If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.

1Seat Belt Reminder

 

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound.

The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

Protecting Child Passengers P. 72
Safe Driving

 

Continued 49

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.

 

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

50

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

 

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

Seats P. 208
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

Pull out slowly.

 

Correct

Seated

Posture.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in.

Safe Driving

 

Latch

 

Plate

Buckle

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

About Your Seat Belts P. 47
Seat Belt Inspection P. 55
Continued 51

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

Lap belt

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

as low as

possible

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

 

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.

Move the anchor up and down while

pulling the shoulder anchor outward.

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over

Pull

your shoulder.

outward

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

52

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

 

Small Latch Plate

 

Latch Plate

 

Small Latch Plate

Anchor Buckle

 

Latch

Plate

Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.
Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

Latch Plate

Small Latch Plate

Safe Driving

Buckle

Continued 53

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

 

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

 

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:

When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
54

Seat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection

 

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

 

WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Safe Driving

 

55

Airbags

Airbag System Components

 

DrivingSafe

8

10

9

8

7

11

6

8

8

8

56

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
The front, side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for the front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

dAn electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.

eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.

fDriver’s seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver’s seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

gWeight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

hImpact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.

jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

kA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 57

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving

 

Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

 

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

58

AirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Types of Airbags

 

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:

Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

 

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system.

Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Types of Airbags

 

The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 59

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

 

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

1How the Front Airbags Work

 

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

60

When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection.

When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

 

Safe Driving

Continued 61

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Advanced Airbags

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

1Advanced Airbags

 

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a

Safe Driving

Driver’s

 

Seat

Position

Sensor

 

Passenger’s Seat

Weight Sensors

The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger’s airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 69
crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position or passenger’s occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 68
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:

The occupant is sitting in an upright position, wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard are not obstructed by any object.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
62

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

1Advanced Airbags

 

There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 69

The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 620

Safe Driving

 

63

AirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Side Airbags

 

The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-backs.

 

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Housing

Location

1Side Airbags

 

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

64

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe

It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

 

Safe Driving

65

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Side Curtain Airbags

 

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags

 

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

 

The side curtain airbags are located in the

ceiling above the side windows on both sides

of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.

66

Operation
AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

 

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side

impact.

Safe Driving

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

67

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving

 

Airbag System Indicators

 

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the power mode is set to ON

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

 

WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

68

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger’s airbag has been turned off. This occurs if the seat is empty or when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

Child Safety P. 72
If the indicator is on in the event of a crash, the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:

The occupant is sitting in an upright position, wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
Safe Driving

 

Continued 69

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,

depending on physique and posture, the system may

not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate

the passenger’s airbag.

If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set

forth in the above bullet points on the previous page

are met.

If the above conditions are met and the indicator is

still on, then with the transmission in park, turn the

ignition off and back on.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible if:

All of the above conditions are met, and the indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front

seat when the indicator is on.

70

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care

 

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009.

1Airbag Care

 

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

 

71

Child Safety

Safe Driving

 

Protecting Child Passengers

 

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a

child sitting in the front seat.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle.

• Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration recommends that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride.

72

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Safety Labels P. 87
Safe Driving

 

73

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Safety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system.

Airbags P. 56
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

1Protecting Infants

 

WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position.

The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

74

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Smaller Children
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

1Protecting Smaller Children

 

WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 75

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat

 

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

76

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in any of the rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks 2. Make sure to lock the seat-back in the

upright position.

Safe Driving

 

Lower

Anchors

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

Rigid Type

u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

object.

Continued 77

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Flexible Type

 

Outer position

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Outer position

Put the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Go to step 8.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

 

WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

78

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Center position

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook Cover

Center position

Put the head restraint to its upper-most position.
Open the anchor cover.
Route the tether strap through the head restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
All models

 

Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
Safe Driving

 

Continued 79

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.

Make sure to lock the seat-back in the upright position.

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

3. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

5. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not

activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the

way out, and repeat steps 4 – 5.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

80

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 81

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether

 

Safe Driving

 

Outer position

 

Tether Anchor Points

 

A tether anchor point is provided behind the rear outer seating position and in the ceiling for the rear center.

If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.

Center position

Tether

Anchor

Point

82

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Anchor

 

Tether Strap Hook

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook Cover

Using an outer anchor
Put the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Using the center anchor
Put the head restraint to its upper-most position.
Open the anchor cover.
Route the tether strap through the head restraint legs.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Safe Driving

 

83

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving

 

Safety of Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist

• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

• Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child’s neck and arm?

• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs?

• Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

 

WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

84

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations.

 

Protecting Larger Children – Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

1Booster Seats

 

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state where you intend to drive.

Safe Driving

 

85

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Safe Driving

 

Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

• The exhaust system may have been damaged.

• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

86

Safety Labels

Label Locations

 

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a

replacement.

Safe

Dashboard

Sun Visor

Driving

Radiator Cap

Sun Visor

High Voltage System

Components

Air Conditioner System

Inverter Coolant Filler

Tank Cap

87

 

This page intentionally left blank.

88

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators 90

Driver Information Interface Warning and

Information Messages 109

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Gauges 126

Driver Information Interface 128

89

Indicators

 

Instrument Panel

 

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator

Shift Position Indicator

Deceleration Paddle

Selector Indicator

Transmission System

Indicator

READY Indicator

POWER SYSTEM

Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

P. 91

P. 92

P. 93

P. 93

P. 93

P. 94

P. 95

P. 95

P. 95

P. 95

P. 93

P. 93

P. 96

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

Low Fuel Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Auto High-Beam Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF Indicator

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

High Beam Indicator

Lights On Indicator

Fog Light Indicator*

System Message

Indicator

ECON Mode Indicator

P. 96

P. 97

P. 97

P. 101

P. 97

P. 98

P. 98

P. 99

P. 100

P. 100

P. 101

P. 101

P. 100

P. 102

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

SPORT Mode Indicator EV Indicator

EV Mode Indicator Road Departure

Mitigation (RDM)

Indicator

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator

Blind spot information System Indicator*

Immobilizer System Indicator

Security System Alarm Indicator

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Green)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber) Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green)

P. 96 P. 94

P. 94

P. 103

P. 107

P. 102

P. 101

P. 102

P. 105

P. 106

P. 106

P. 106

*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the power system has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner’s manual.

* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the parking

Comes on while driving – Make sure the

brake is applied and goes off

parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.

when it is released.

2 What to do when the indicator comes

Comes on when the brake fluid

on while driving P. 654

level is low.

Comes on along with the Parking

Comes on if there is a problem

Brake and Brake System Indicator

with the brake system.

(Amber) – Immediately stop in a safe place.

The beeper sounds and the

Contact a dealer for repair. The brake pedal

indicator comes on if you drive

becomes harder to operate. Depress the

with the parking brake applied.

pedal further than you normally do.

Comes on for about 15 seconds

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

when you apply the electric

Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time

When the Brake System Indicator

Parking Brake

parking brake while the power

(Amber) Comes On P. 655

and Brake

mode is in ACCESSORY or

Comes on along with the ABS

(Red)

System Indicator

VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.

indicator – Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

(Red)

Stays on for about 15 seconds

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

when you set the power mode to

Comes On or Blinks P. 654

VEHICLE OFF while the electric

Blinks and the Parking Brake and

parking brake is applied, then

Brake System Indicator (Amber) comes

goes off.

on at the same time – There is a problem

with the electric parking brake system. The

parking brake may not be set.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time

When the Brake System Indicator

(Amber) Comes On P. 655

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 91

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on if there is a problem

Comes on while driving – Avoid high

with a system related to braking

speeds and sudden braking. Take the

other than the conventional brake

vehicle to a dealer immediately.

system.

Comes on if there is a problem

with the cooperative control with

regenerative braking, the electric

servo brake system, or the hill start

assist system.

Comes on if there is a problem

Stays on constantly – Avoid using the

Parking Brake

parking brake and have your vehicle

with the electric parking brake

and Brake

checked by a dealer immediately.

system or the automatic brake

System Indicator

(Amber)

hold system.

(Amber)

Comes on if the brake system is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

12-volt battery has been

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

disconnected, then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

Comes on if there is a problem

Make sure the total load is within the

with the radar sensor.

Maximum Load Limit.

Indicator may come on

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 463

temporarily when the Maximum

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Load Limit is exceeded.

checked by a dealer.

92

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Automatic Brake

Comes on when the automatic

Hold System

brake hold system is on.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 555

Indicator

Comes on when the automatic

Automatic Brake

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 555

Hold Indicator

brake hold is activated.

Low Oil Pressure

Comes on when the engine oil

Comes on while driving – Immediately

pressure is low.

stop in a safe place.

Indicator

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Comes On P. 652

Comes on if there is a problem

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Power System

with the electric vehicle system.

checked by a dealer immediately.

Comes on when the High Voltage

Indicator

battery temperature becomes

high.

READY

Comes on when the vehicle is

ready to drive.

2 Turning on the Power P. 469

Indicator

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 93

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the vehicle is

EV Indicator

moved by the motor, and the

engine is not operating.

EV Mode

Comes on when the vehicle is in

2 SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent

EV mode.

Indicator

Multi-Mode Drive) P. 11

After you have set the power

Readiness codes are part of the on board

mode to ON, the vehicle performs

diagnostics for the emissions control

system checks.

systems.

However, if the readiness codes

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 673

have not been set by that time,

Comes on while driving – Have your

this indicator will blink five times

vehicle checked by a dealer.

and then go off.

Comes on when there is no gasoline in the

Comes on if there is a problem

fuel tank, and goes off after vehicle is

Malfunction

with the emissions control systems

refueled, power mode is turned on,

or electric vehicle system.

vehicle is driven, and the power system is

Indicator Lamp

Blinks when a misfire in the

turned off multiple times. If it does not go

engine’s cylinders is detected.

off, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Blinks while driving – Stop in a safe

place where there are no flammable

objects. Stop the power system for 10

minutes or more, and wait for it to cool

down. Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Comes On or Blinks P. 653

94

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

12-volt Battery

Comes on when there is a

Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle

problem with the charging

checked by a dealer immediately.

Charging

system.

2 If the 12-volt Battery Charging

System Indicator

System Indicator Comes On P. 652

Shift Position

Indicates the current shift

position.

2 Shifting P. 477

Indicator

The indicated current shift

Avoid sudden start and acceleration, and

position blinks if there is a

stop in a safe place immediately.

problem with the transmission

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Transmission

system.

System Indicator

The indicated current shift

Set the parking brake when parking.

position or all the shift positions

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer

blink if you cannot select (P due

immediately.

to the transmission system failure.

Comes on when the paddle

selector is pulled.

Deceleration

Blinks when the deceleration does

not occur while pulling the paddle

Paddle Selector

2 Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 484

selector.

Indicator

Comes on with M when SPORT

mode is selected and pulling the

paddle selector.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 95

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

SPORT Mode

Comes on when you press the

The ambient meter remains lit up in red as

SPORT button.

long as sport mode is on.

Indicator

2 SPORT Mode P. 483

Blinks and the beeper sounds for a

The beeper stops and the indicator goes

few seconds if you are not

off when you and the front passenger

wearing a seat belt when you set

fasten their seat belts.

the power mode to ON, then the

Stays on after you and/or the front

indicator comes on.

passenger has fastened the seat belt(s)

Seat Belt

If the front passenger is not

– A detection error may have occurred in

Reminder

wearing a seat belt, the indicator

the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a

Indicator

comes on a few seconds later.

dealer.

Blinks while driving if you and/or

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 49

the front passenger has not

fastened a seat belt. The beeper

sounds and the indicator blinks at

regular intervals.

Comes on when the fuel reserve is

Comes on – Refuel your vehicle as soon as

Low Fuel

running low (approximately 2.1

possible.

U.S. gal/8.0 Liter left).

Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a

Indicator

Blinks if there is a problem with

dealer.

the fuel gauge.

96

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on if there is a problem

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake

with the ABS.

checked by a dealer. With this indicator

System (ABS)

on, your vehicle still has normal braking

Indicator

ability but no anti-lock function.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 557

Comes on if a problem with any of

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Supplemental

the following is detected:

checked by a dealer.

– Supplemental restraint system

Restraint System

– Side airbag system

Indicator

– Side curtain airbag system

– Seat belt tensioner

Blinks when VSA® is active.

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Comes on if there is a problem with

checked by a dealer.

the VSA® system.

2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka

Vehicle Stability

Electronic Stability Control (ESC),

System P. 489

AssistTM (VSA®)

System Indicator

Comes on if the VSA® system is

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph

deactivated temporarily after the

(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it

12-volt battery has been

does not, have your vehicle checked by a

disconnected, then re-connected.

dealer.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 97

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when you partially

disable VSA®.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 490

Vehicle Stability

AssistTM (VSA®)

Comes on if the VSA® system is

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph

OFF Indicator

deactivated temporarily after the

(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it

12-volt battery has been

does not, have your vehicle checked by a

disconnected, then re-connected.

dealer.

Electric Power

Comes on if there is a problem

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

with the EPS System.

checked by a dealer.

Steering (EPS)

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)

System Indicator

System Indicator Comes On P. 656

98

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

May come on briefly if the power

Comes on while driving – Stop in a safe

mode is set to ON and the vehicle

place, check tire pressures, and inflate the

is not moved within 45 seconds,

tire(s) if necessary.

to indicate the calibration process

Stays on after the tires are inflated to

is not yet complete.

the recommended pressures – The

Comes on and stays on when:

system needs to be calibrated.

– One or more tires’ pressures are

2 TPMS Calibration P. 494

Low Tire

determined to be significantly

low.

Pressure/TPMS

– The system has not been

Indicator

calibrated.

Blinks for about one minute, and

Blinks and remains on – Have your

then stays on if there is a problem

vehicle checked by a dealer.

with the TPMS.

Comes on if the TPMS is

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph

deactivated temporarily after the

(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it

12-volt battery has been

does not, have your vehicle checked by a

disconnected, then reconnected.

dealer.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 99

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on along with a beep

While the indicator is on, press the

when a problem is detected. A

(display/information) button to see the

system message on the driver

message again.

information interface appears at

Refer to the Indicators information in this

the same time.

System Message

chapter when a system message appears

on the driver information interface.

Indicator

Respond to the message accordingly.

The driver information interface does not

return to the normal screen unless the

warning is canceled, or the

button is

pressed.

Blinks when you operate the turn

Does not blink or blinks rapidly

Turn Signal and

signal lever.

– Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Hazard Warning

Blink along with all turn signals

Indicators

when you press the hazard

warning button.

High Beam

Comes on when the high beam

Indicator

headlights are on.

100

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Lights On

Comes on when the parking, tail,

2 Light Switches P. 190

Indicator

and other external lights are on.

Fog Light

Comes on when the fog lights are

2 Fog Lights* P. 194

on.

Indicator*

Auto High-Beam

Comes on when all the operating

conditions of the auto high-beam

2 Auto High-Beam P. 195

Indicator

are met.

Blinks if the immobilizer system

Blinks – You cannot start the power

cannot recognize the key

system. Set the power mode to VEHICLE

information.

OFF, then select the ON mode again.

Immobilizer

Repeatedly blinks – The system may be

malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked

System Indicator

by a dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add

Indicator

other devices to it. Electrical problems can

occur.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 101

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Blinks when the security system alarm has been set.
Security System

2

Security System Alarm* P. 178

Alarm Indicator

Indicator

Comes on when the ECON mode

ECON Mode

is on.

2

ECON Mode P. 487

Indicator

Stays on while the blind spot

2 Blind spot information System*

information system is turned off.

P. 499

Blind spot

Comes on when mud, snow, or

Comes on while driving – Remove the

information

ice accumulates in the vicinity of

obstacle in the vicinity of the sensor.

System

sensor.

2 Blind spot information System*

Indicator*

P. 499

Comes on if there is a problem

Comes on while driving – Have your

with the system.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on if there is a problem

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

with the RDM system.

checked by a dealer.

Comes on if the RDM is

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph

deactivated temporarily after the

(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it

12-volt battery has been

does not, have your vehicle checked by a

Road Departure

disconnected, then re-connected.

dealer.

Mitigation

Comes on when the RDM system

Stays on – The temperature inside the

(RDM) Indicator

shuts itself off.

camera is too high.

Use the climate control system to cool

down the camera.

The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools

down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 548

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 103

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the RDM system

Stays on – The area around the camera is

shuts itself off.

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris

off with a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator and message come back on

after you cleaned the area around the

camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 548

Indicator may come on temporarily when

passing through an enclosed space, such

as a tunnel.

Road Departure

The area around the radar sensor is

Mitigation

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

(RDM) Indicator

vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris

off with a soft cloth. Indicator may take

some time to go off after the radar sensor

is cleaned.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator does not go off even after

you cleaned the radar sensor.

2 Radar Sensor P. 550

Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 463

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

104

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on if there is a problem

Comes on while driving – Have your

with ACC with Low Speed Follow.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if the ACC with Low

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph

Adaptive Cruise

Speed Follow is deactivated

(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it

temporarily after the 12-volt

does not, have your vehicle checked by a

Control (ACC)

battery has been disconnected,

dealer.

with Low Speed

then re-connected.

Follow Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

Make sure the total load is within the

(Amber)

with ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Maximum Load Limit.

Indicator may come on

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 463

temporarily when Maximum Load

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Limit is exceeded.

checked by a dealer.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has

been automatically canceled.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 105

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Adaptive Cruise

Comes on when you press the

Control (ACC)

MAIN button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

with Low Speed

Low Speed Follow P. 517

Follow Indicator

(Green)

Lane Keeping

Comes on if there is a problem

● Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Assist System

with the LKAS.

checked by a dealer.

(LKAS) Indicator

(Amber)

Lane Keeping

Comes on when you press the

Assist System

MAIN button.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

(LKAS) Indicator

P. 534

(Green)

106

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when you deactivate

Stays on constantly without the

the CMBSTM. A driver information

CMBSTM off – Have your vehicle checked

interface message appears for five

by a dealer.

seconds.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking

Comes on if there is a problem

SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 506

with the CMBSTM.

Collision

Comes on if the CMBSTM is

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph

Mitigation

deactivated temporarily after the

(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it

Braking

12-volt battery has been

does not, have your vehicle checked by a

SystemTM

disconnected, then re-connected.

dealer.

(CMBSTM)

Comes on when the CMBSTM

Stays on – The area around the camera is

Indicator

shuts itself off.

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with

a soft cloth.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 548

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator does not go off even after

you cleaned the camera.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 107

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the CMBSTM

Indicator may come on temporarily when

shuts itself off.

passing through an enclosed space, such

as a tunnel.

The area around the radar sensor is

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with

a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time

to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

Collision

the indicator does not go off even after

Mitigation

you clean the sensor cover.

Braking

2 Radar Sensor P. 550

SystemTM

Stays on – The temperature inside the

(CMBSTM)

camera is too high. Use the climate control

Indicator

system to cool down the camera. The

system activates when the temperature

inside the camera cools down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 548

Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 463

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

108

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

 

The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (display/information) button to see the message again with the system message indicator on.

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely

Disappears when all doors and the tailgate are

closed.

closed.

Appears if any door or the tailgate is opened while

driving. The beeper sounds.

Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with

Models with parking sensor system

Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor

mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even

system.

after you clean the area, have the system checked by

If there is a problem with any of the sensors, the all

a dealer.

sensor indicator(s) comes on in red.

Appears if there is a problem with the acoustic vehicle

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

alerting system.

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver

Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and

Information Interface P. 583

Maintenance Past Due follow.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 109

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the shutter grille,

Power output will be reduced, so you may not be

and the radiator coolant temperature is too high.

able to accelerate or maintain your current speed.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears when there is a problem with the 12-volt

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

battery charging system.

Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

canceled while it is in operation.

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets

abnormally high.

2 Overheating P. 649

Appears when the engine coolant temperature is near

Drive slowly to prevent overheating.

its upper limit.

110

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the cooling system. ● Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Appears when you set the power mode to ON without

Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.

fastening the driver’s seat belt.

(White)

Appears when you try to change the transmission

Depress the brake pedal, then change the

without depressing the brake pedal.

transmission.

Appears when you try to change the transmission

Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then

without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

change the transmission.

Appears when the (P button is pressed while the

Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before

vehicle is moving.

operating the shift button.

Appears if you put the transmission into (R while the

vehicle is moving forward, or into (D while the vehicle

is reversing.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 111

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the electric system. ● Immediately stop in a safe place and set the parking
● Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while brake, then restart the power system. If the message

driving. disappears, continue driving.

● Continue driving if the message goes off soon after.

● If there is a problem with the transmission system,

the transmission indicator system comes on.

2 Transmission System Indicator P. 95

Appears when the automatic brake hold system is
turned off.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 555

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 555

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is

Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake

pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the

pedal depressed.

automatic brake hold is in operation.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 555

Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while it is in operation.

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 555

2

Parking Brake P. 551

112

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the electric parking brake switch is

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake

pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the

pedal depressed.

electric parking brake is in operation.

2 Parking Brake P. 551

Appears when the vehicle is no longer able to run due

Immediately stop in a safe place.

to a malfunction.

Appears when there is a risk that the vehicle will move

While the vehicle is stopped, apply the parking brake.

unexpectedly after you have stopped due to a

2 Parking Brake P. 551

malfunction with the vehicle.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the keyless

Appears constantly – Have your vehicle checked by

access system or push button starting system.

a dealer.

● Appears when you close the door with the power

● Disappears when you bring the keyless remote back

mode in ON without the keyless remote inside the

inside the vehicle and close the door.

vehicle.

2 Keyless Remote Reminder P. 188

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 113

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the keyless remote battery becomes
weak.

2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 617

Appears when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY
or ON.

2 Turning on the Power P. 469

Appears if you press the POWER button while the
vehicle is moving.

2 Emergency Power System Off P. 646

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the

Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

power mode is in ACCESSORY.

2 POWER Button P. 186

Appears if the keyless remote’s battery is too weak to

Bring the back of the keyless remote into contact

turn on the power system or the key is not within

with the POWER button.

operating range to turn on the power system. The

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 645

beeper sounds six times.

114

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when you press and hold (N button for more

Disappears when you set the shift position to a shift

than two seconds.

other than (N.

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N

position [car wash mode] P. 481

Appears when the vehicle is stopped with the driver’s

Press the (P button before release the brake pedal

seat belt unfastened and there is a chance that the

when idling, parking or exiting the vehicle.

vehicle may roll unintentionally.

2 Shift Operation P. 479

Appears when the power system temperature is high. ● Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be harder to start on an incline.
Park in a safe place, and cool the system down.
2 Overheating P. 649

Appears when the High Voltage battery temperature is

Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be

low.

harder to start on an incline.

Goes off once you start driving as the High Voltage

battery warms up.

Appears after the 12-volt battery charging system

Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be

indicator comes on.

harder to start on an incline.

Contact a dealer immediately.

Appears when the High Voltage battery temperature is

You can start the engine and use the climate control

too low to operate (approx. -22°F [-30°C] or below).

system to warm up the interior, which will also warm

the High Voltage battery enough for you to drive the

vehicle.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 115

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the High Voltage battery and other

You must wait for an increase in the ambient

system control temperatures are too low to operate

temperature or move the vehicle to a warmer

(approx. -40°F [-40°C] or below).

location.

Consult a dealer if necessary.

Appears if the power system is in diagnostic mode.

You may notice a decrease in available power. Have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

As a result of diagnostics, the power system indicator

may come on.

2 Power System Indicator P. 93

Appears when you have met following situations and

EV mode is available once the condition is improved

EV mode is canceled.

or the cause that canceled EV mode is cleared.

Battery Temperature At Limit.
Battery Charge Too Low.
Engine Too Cold.
Cabin Being Heated.
Speed Too High.
Hard Acceleration Requested.
● Appears when you depress the accelerator pedal while

● Remove your foot off the accelerator pedal. When

the shift position is in (N.

driving, depress the brake pedal and operate the shift

position.

116

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when you put the transmission into (N, then

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N

release the (N button.

position [car wash mode] P. 481

Appears when you repeatedly change the shift position

Take some time before changing the shift position.

between (P and other positions in short period.

Appears if the engine needs to be started when you

press the EV button.

Appears when you have met following situations and

EV mode is available once the condition is improved

EV mode has been automatically canceled.

or the cause that canceled EV mode is cleared.

– When the High Voltage battery charge is low.

– When the velocity of your vehicle is high.

– When your vehicle’s speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)

before the engine warms up enough.

– When depressing the accelerator pedal deeply.

– When driving on a slope.

Appears when the High Voltage battery is running

Contact a dealer immediately.

extremely low.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 117

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears while driving – Manually turn the lights

Appears if there is a problem with the automatic

lighting control system.

on, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.

Appears while driving – The headlights may not be

on.

When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door
while the power system is on by remote engine start.

2

Remote Engine Start P. 471

Appears if the vehicle is being driven in a manner

consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving.

2

Driver Attention Monitor P. 135

Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been

● You can resume the set speed after the condition

automatically canceled.

that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel

improves. Press the RES/+ button.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

118

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the distance between your vehicle and

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC with

canceled.

Low Speed Follow is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

you is too close.

Follow P. 517

Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with Low

canceled.

Speed Follow.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high for

Reduce the speed, then set ACC.

you to set ACC.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive high

Reduce the speed, then reset ACC.

vehicle speed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 119

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Press the RES/+ button or –/SET button or depress

Appears when the vehicle ahead of you resumes

driving, after your vehicle has been stopped

the accelerator pedal.

automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears if the VSA® or traction control function

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

operates while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in

canceled.

operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when the shift position is changed to any

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

position other than (D while ACC with Low Speed

canceled.

Follow is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

shift position is in any position other than (D.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

slope while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in

canceled.

operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

120

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

● ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears when the parking brake is applied

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

automatically while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in

canceled.

operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

2

Parking Brake P. 551

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

parking brake is applied.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

2

Parking Brake P. 551

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

Appears if ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC

with Low Speed Follow.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 121

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply

vehicle in front of you.

the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 517

2

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

P. 506

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected

2

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 534

lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected

2

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 543

lane.

You can change the setting for the road departure

mitigation system. Narrow, Normal, Wide, and

When you selected Warning Only

Warning Only can be selected.

– The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is

2

Customized Features P. 140, 369

drifting out of a detected lane.

When you selected Narrow, Normal or Wide

– The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is

drifting out of a detected lane. The system also steers

the vehicle to help you remain within your driving

lane.

122

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

When you selected Narrow

Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a

detected lane.

The RDM system also steers the vehicle to help you

remain within your driving lane.

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper

Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

sounds simultaneously.

Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS

If any other system indicators come on, such as the

button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system

VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate

related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically.

action.

The beeper sounds simultaneously if selected by

2 Indicators P. 90

customization.

Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover and

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in

prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.

a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow,

message may take some time to go off.

fog, etc.)

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message

does not disappear even after you clean the sensor

cover.

2 Radar Sensor P. 550

2 Honda Sensing® P. 503

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 123

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor

Use the climate control system to cool down the

camera is too high and some driver assist systems

camera.

cannot be activated.

Disappears – The camera has been cooled down

and the systems are activated normally.

2

Front Sensor Camera P. 548

2

Honda Sensing® P. 503

Appears if the area around the front sensor camera is

When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from

in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

detecting a vehicle in front.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow,

does not disappear even after you cleaned the area

fog, etc.)

around the camera.

2

Front Sensor Camera P. 548

2

Honda Sensing® P. 503

Appears if there is a problem with the auto high-beam. ● Manually operate the headlight switch.
If you are driving with the high beam headlights when this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
124

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the real time AWD

● The engine drives the front wheels only in this state.

with intelligent control systemTM.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears when the differential temperature is too high. ● Stop in a safe place, change to (P, and idle the engine until the message disappears. If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM P. 492

Models with power tailgate

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when there is a problem with the power

Manually open or close the power tailgate.

tailgate system.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with color audio system

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears while you are customizing the settings and the
shift position changed out of (P.

2 Customized Features P. 140

Instrument Panel

 

125

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

 

Gauges

 

Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.

Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

POWER/CHARGE Gauge
Electric motor
The degree to which the electric motor is being powered is displayed by the readings on the POWER side.

Battery charge in progress
The degree to which the High Voltage battery is being charged is displayed by the readings on the CHARGE side.

1Gauges

Press the (display/information) button repeatedly until the icon is shown on the driver information interface. Press ENTER, then press and hold it again. The speedometer reading and the displayed measurements will switch between mph and km/h.

 

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

126

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
Shows the remaining High Voltage battery charge level.

1High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge

 

The High Voltage battery charge level may decrease under the following conditions:

When the 12-volt battery has been replaced.
When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.
When the High Voltage battery control system corrects its reading.
The charge level reading will be corrected

automatically while driving.

Changes in the temperature of the High Voltage battery can increase or decrease the battery’s charging capacity. If temperature changes cause the battery’s capacity to change, the number of indicators in the battery charge level gauge may also change, even if the amount of charge remains the same.

Instrument Panel

 

127

 

Instrument Panel

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Driver Information Interface

 

The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

Switching the Display
Main displays

Press the

(display/information) button, and then press

or

to change the

display. Press ENTER to see detailed information.

 

(Display/

Information)

Button

Press ,

or .

Press ENTER.

Eco Drive

Power Flow

Range &

Average

Average

Navigation*

Driver

Display

Monitor

Fuel

Fuel

Speed &

& Compass*

Attention

Economy

Elapsed Time

Monitor

Records

Warning

Customize*

Phone*

Audio*

Maintenance

AWD Torque

Messages

MinderTM

Distribution

Monitor

Speed Unit &

Disp OFF

* Not available on all models
Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip computer
Press the (TRIP) knob to change display.

 

Odometer

Trip A

Trip B

Outside temperature

(TRIP)

Knob

Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

1Trip Meter

 

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 129

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

 

Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining power and fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.

Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Instant Fuel Economy Gauge
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

1Average Fuel Economy

 

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
1Elapsed Time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
1Average Speed

You can change when to reset the average speed.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
130

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Maintenance MinderTM
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 581
Average Fuel Economy Records
Shows the average fuel economy for the last

 

three driving cycles (1-3), and the current

driving cycle (0) in mpg or l/100 km.

Each time you set the power mode to ON, the

display is updated, and the oldest record is

deleted.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 131

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Eco Drive Display/Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
Eco Drive Display
The vehicle icon on the display moves forward or backward while driving.

The more aggressive the acceleration is, the further the icon moves forward.

The more aggressive the deceleration is, the further the icon moves backward.

Keep the icon near the center of the circle for better fuel economy while driving.

 

Aggressive Moderate Slow Moderate Aggressive

Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration/ Acceleration Acceleration

Deceleration

Vehicle Icon

132

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
Appear for a few seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Each has three stages. Depending on your driving style, the leaf icon(s) and the gauge increase or decrease to indicate that you have reached a different stage of fuel economy.

Drive Cycle

Advancing to

Advancing to

Score

2nd Stage

3rd Stage

Lifetime

Receding to

Receding to

Points

2nd Stage

3rd Stage

 

Resetting the Drive Cycle Score
Make sure the shift position is in P. Turn the power mode to ON.
If ECON mode is on, press the ECON button to turn it off.
Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
Turn the power mode to ON again.
u Make sure to complete steps from 4 through 6 within 30 seconds.

Depress the brake pedal twice.
Press the ECON button twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will turn to monochrome.

Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
Instrument Panel

 

Continued 133

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Power Flow Monitor
Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle’s power source and whether the battery is being charged.

 

1Power Flow Monitor

 

While the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the following may appear on the driver information interface.

Instrument

Power Flow

Engine ON

Engine OFF

Panel

Engine

Hybrid (HV)

Power is supplied by the motor and the engine.

Regeneration

The motor is charging the High Voltage battery.

Electric Vehicle (EV)

Engine (Direct Drive)

Power is supplied by

The engine is running

the motor.

and the motor is charging

the High Voltage battery.

Power is being The engine is running

supplied by the engine and the motor is

only. charging the High

Voltage battery.

134

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.

 

Driver Information Interface

ENTER

(Display/ Information) Button

When the (display/information) button is pressed, bars in the Driver Information Interface light up in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s attention.

 

Switching the Display P. 128
Level

1Driver Attention Monitor

 

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive.

Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 135

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

If two bars light up, the Driver Attention

 

Level Low message will appear.

If one bar lights up, the Driver Attention

 

Level Low. Time For A Break message will

appear, a beep will sound, and the steering

wheel will vibrate.

If this message appears, stop in a safe location

and rest for as long as needed.

The message will disappear when the ENTER

button is pressed or when the system has

determined that the driver is driving normally.

If the driver does not take a break and the

monitor continues to detect that the driver is

very tired, the message will appear again after

approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a

beep and steering wheel vibrations.

The message does not appear when the

traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

136

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
The Driver Attention Monitor resets when
the power system is turned off.
the driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.
For the Driver Attention Monitor to function
the vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention Monitor may not function in the following circumstances.
the steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 534

the condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
it is windy.
the driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as changing lanes or accelerating.
Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible Alert, Tactile Alert, or OFF.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function

 

The bars in the Driver Information Interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 137

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

AWD Torque Distribution Monitor
The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels.

 

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM P. 492
Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit.

Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

1Outside Temperature

 

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

You can adjust the temperature reading.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
138

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Navigation*
Compass*
Shows the compass screen.

Turn-by-Turn Directions
When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system* or Android Auto, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.

Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Android AutoTM P. 336
Audio*
Show the current audio information.

Audio System Basic Operation P. 272
Phone*
Show the current phone information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 422
1Navigation*

 

You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance.

Customized Features P. 369
Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 139

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Models with color audio system

 

Customized Features
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

How to customize
Select the screen by pressing the button while the power mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift position is in P. Select , then press the ENTER button.

 

1Customized Features

 

To customize other features, press the 3 / 4 button.

List of customizable options P. 143
Example of customization settings P. 147
Put the transmission into (P before you attempt to change any customized setting.

Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

Button
Press to go to the next display.

ENTER Button

Press to set your

selection.

Button

Press to go to Vehicle

Settings.

140

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Customization flow
Press the button.

 

Vehicle Settings ENTER

 

TPMS Calibration

3

4

 

Driver Assist System Setup

3

ENTER

4

3

4

 

Forward Collision Warning Distance

 

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting

 

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Driver Attention Monitor

 

Language Selection

 

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

 

“Trip A” Reset Timing

 

Instrument Panel

ENTER

3

4

 

Meter Setup

3

4

 

ENTER

 

3

4

 

“Trip B” Reset Timing

 

Adjust Alarm Volume

 

Reverse Alert Tone

 

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

 

Speed/Distance Units

 

Continued 141

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

 

3

4

ENTER

3

4

Keyless Access Setup

3

4

Lighting Setup

3

4

Door Setup

3

4

Maintenance Reset

3

4

Default All

3

4

Exit

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

3

4

3

4

3

4

Door Unlock Mode

Keyless Access Light Flash

Keyless Access Beep Remote Start System ON/OFF

Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Auto Light Sensitivity

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Key And Remote Unlock Mode Walk Away Auto Lock Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer

142

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

List of customizable options
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS

Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

Calibration

Forward Collision

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system detects

a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC

ON/OFF*1

Detect Beep

range.

Driver Assist

System

Road Departure

Changes the setting for the road departure

Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/

Setup

Mitigation Setting

mitigation system.

Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is

ON/OFF*1

Suspend Beep

suspended.

Driver Attention Monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile And Audible Alert*1/

Tactile Alert/OFF

 

*1:Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 143

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Language Selection

Changes the displayed language.

English*1/Français/Español

Adjust Outside Temp.

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Display

degrees.

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter

When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/

A, average fuel economy A, average speed A,

Manually Reset*1

and elapsed time A.

Meter Setup

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter

When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/

B, average fuel economy B, average speed B,

Manually Reset*1

and elapsed time B.

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,

High/Mid*1/Low

warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Reverse Alert Tone

Causes the beeper to sound once when the

ON*1/OFF

shift position is changed to (R.

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

km/h∙km/mph∙miles*1

*1:Default Setting

144

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

Driver Door Only*1/All Doors

driver’s door handle.

Keyless

Keyless Access Light

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you

ON*1/OFF

Flash

unlock/lock the doors.

Access

Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either

Setup

Keyless Access Beep

ON*1/OFF

front door handle.

Remote Start System

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

ON/OFF

Interior Light Dimming

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Time

after you close the doors.

Headlight Auto OFF

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Timer

on after you close the driver’s door.

Lighting

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Setup

Auto Interior

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Illumination Sensitivity

AUTO position.

Auto Headlight ON With

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when

the headlights automatically come on while the

ON*1/OFF

Wiper ON

headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

 

*1: Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 145

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Auto Door Lock

Changes the setting for when the doors and the

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift

tailgate automatically lock.

From P/OFF

When Driver’s Door Opens*1/

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors and the

When Shifting Into Park/

tailgate automatically unlock.

When Ignition Switched

OFF/OFF

Key And Remote Unlock

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock

Driver Door*1/All Doors

Mode

on the first operation of the keyless remote.

Door Setup

Changes the settings for the automatic locking the

Walk Away Auto Lock

doors when you walk away from the vehicle while

ON/OFF*1

carrying the keyless remote.

Keyless Lock Answer

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

ON*1/OFF

Back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and

Security Relock Timer

the security system to set after you unlock the

90sec/60sec/30sec*1

vehicle without opening any door.

Maintenance

Resets the Maintenance MinderTM display when you

Cancel/All Due Items

Reset

have performed the maintenance service.

Default All

Cancels customized changes you have made or

Cancel/Set

restores them to their default setting.

 

*1: Default Setting

146

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Fully Refueled are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.

Press the button to select , then press the ENTER button.

Instrument Panel

Press the 3 / 4 button until Meter Setup appears on the display.
Press the ENTER button.

u Language Selection appears first in the

display.

Continued 147

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Press the 3 / 4 button until “Trip A” Reset Timing appears on the display, then press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When Fully Refueled, IGN OFF, Manually Reset, or Exit.

Press the 3 / 4 button and select When Fully Refueled, then press the ENTER button.
u The When Fully Refueled Setup screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

Press the 3 / 4 button until Exit appears on the display, then press the ENTER button.
Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.

148

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock 150

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key 152

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength 154

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside 155

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside 163

Childproof Door Locks 165

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking 166

Tailgate 167

Security System

Immobilizer System 178

Security System Alarm* 178

Windows ………………………………………..

181

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

Moonroof* ………………………………….

185

Button …………………………………….

201

Operating the Switches Around the

Brightness Control ………………………

202

Steering Wheel

Driving Position Memory System* …. 203

POWER Button……………………………

186

Adjusting the Steering Wheel ……….

205

Turn Signals ……………………………….

189

Mirrors………………………………………..

206

Light Switches…………………………….

190

Seats …………………………………………..

208

Fog Lights* ………………………………..

194

Interior Convenience Items…………..

218

Daytime Running Lights ……………….

194

Climate Control System

Auto High-Beam …………………………

195

Using Automatic Climate Control ….

235

Wipers and Washers ……………………

198

Automatic Climate Control Sensors ……

241

* Not available on all models 149

Clock

Adjusting the Clock

 

Models with Display Audio

 

The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.

All models

 

You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power mode is in ON.

1Adjusting the Clock

 

The clock in the driver information interface is automatically adjusted along with the audio system’s clock display.

Controls

 

Adjusting the Time

Selector Knob

MENU/CLOCK Button

Models with color audio system

 

Using the MENU/CLOCK button
Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button. u Adjust Clock is selected.
Rotate to change hour, then press .
Rotate to change minute, then press
.

To enter the selection, rotate and select Set, then press .

1Using the MENU/CLOCK button

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

Customized Features P. 362
150

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with Display Audio

 

Using the Settings menu on the audio/ information screen

Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock Adjustment.
Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

 

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock and turn the clock display on and off.

Customized Features P. 369
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display.

Touch the clock on the display for a few seconds.
Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock Adjustment.
Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.
You cannot adjust the time while the vehicle is moving.

Controls

 

151

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Controls

 

Key

 

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Use the keys to turn on and off the power system, and to lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.

 

Built-in Key
Built-in Key

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the

doors when the keyless remote battery

becomes weak and the power door lock/

unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, slide the release

knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall

the built-in key, push the built-in key into the

Release Knob

keyless remote until it clicks.

 

1Key

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps protect against vehicle theft.

2 Immobilizer System P. 178

Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys:

Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the power system may not activate, and the remote transmitter may not work.

If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

You can remotely turn the power system on using the remote engine start.

Remote Engine Start P. 471
152

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey
Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.

 

1Key Number Tag

 

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot activate the power system, contact a dealer.

 

Controls

153

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

 

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote when locking/ unlocking the doors, opening the tailgate, or to activate the power system.

In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the tailgate, or activating the power system may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:

Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.

Controls

1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

 

Communication between the keyless remote and the vehicle consumes the keyless remote’s battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use.

The battery is consumed whenever the keyless remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

154

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Using the Keyless Access System

When you carry the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and open the tailgate. You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle.

 

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

 

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors and tailgate.

No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds.

Doors and tailgate relocked: The light goes off immediately.

2 Interior Lights P. 218

 

Controls

Continued 155

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

Door Lock

 

Sensor

 

Lock Button

Locking the doors and tailgate
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door or press the lock button on the tailgate.

u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system* sets.

1Using the Keyless Access System

 

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

The keyless access system will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone else with the keyless remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the keyless remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by locking or unlocking the doors.
* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Unlocking the doors and tailgate

Grab the driver’s door handle:

u The driver’s door unlocks.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.

Grab the front passenger’s door handle:

u All the doors and tailgate unlock.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.

Press the tailgate outer handle:

 

u The tailgate unlocks.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.

2 Opening/Closing the Tailgate P. 168

Outer Handle

1Using the Keyless Access System

 

After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate with the keyless remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close to the door, door glass and tailgate.
The light flashes, and beeper sounds and unlock settings can be customized using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
Models with power tailgate

You can also unlock and open with the power tailgate.

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 174
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 157

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

 

Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk
away auto lock®)

When you walk away from the vehicle with all doors and tailgate closed while carrying the keyless remote, the doors and tailgate will automatically lock.

The auto lock function activates when all doors and tailgate are closed, and the keyless remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle.

Exit vehicle while carrying keyless remote and close door(s) and tailgate.

While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will be activated.

Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and tailgate will then lock.

1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)

 

The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the driver information interface* or audio/ information screen*.

If you set the auto lock function to ON using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, only the keyless remote that was used to unlock the driver’s door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote will continue to flash until the doors and tailgate are locked.

When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors and tailgate will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.

When you open a door or tailgate after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be canceled.

* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
To temporarily deactivate the function:

Set the power mode to OFF.
Open the driver’s door.
Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows:
Lock Unlock Lock Unlock.

u The beeper sounds and the function is deactivated.

To restore the function:

Set the power mode to ON.
Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function.
With the keyless remote on you, move out of the auto lock function operation range.
Open any door.
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)

 

Under the following circumstances, the auto lock function will not activate:

The keyless remote is inside the vehicle. uThe beeper will not sound.
The keyless remote is taken out of its operational range before all doors and tailgate are closed.
uThe beeper will sound.

Models with power tailgate

If equipped, the user must wait until the power tailgate fully closes before the auto lock function will be activated.

The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met.

The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
A door, tailgate or the hood is not closed.
The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF.
The keyless remote is not located within a radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors and tailgate.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases.

The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through a window.
You are located too close to the vehicle.
The keyless remote is put inside the tailgate.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.

Controls

 

Continued 159

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

Controls

 

LED

 

Lock

Unlock Button

Button

Locking the doors and tailgate Press the lock button.
Once:

u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and tailgate lock, and the security system* sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first push):

u The beeper sounds and verifies the security system* is set.

Unlocking the doors and tailgate Press the unlock button.
Once:

u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.

Twice:

u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

You can change the relock timer setting.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.

Replacing the Remote Battery P. 617
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the lock or unlock button of the remote transmitter does not work, use the key instead.

Fully insert the key and turn it.

 

Lock

Unlock

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

 

When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
Controls

 

Continued 161

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

Locking a Door Without Using a Key
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.

Locking the driver’s door

Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.

Locking the passenger’s doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

Lockout prevention system
The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

 

When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time.

Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.

162

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door

Lock Tab

To lock

Push the lock tab forward.

■ Unlocking a door

 

Pull the lock tab rearward.

To unlock

1Using the Lock Tab

 

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all of the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time.

When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.

 

Controls

Continued 163

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls

 

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle.

 

u The door unlocks and opens in one motion.

Inner Handle

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.

To avoid all the doors unlocking use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door.

u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to unlock all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF*1/Off*2 using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*.

Models with color audio system

 

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

 

Customized Features P. 369
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

 

The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.

Childproof Door Locks P. 165
*1: Models with color audio

*2: Models with Display Audio

* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.

 

To lock

To unlock

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

 

When you lock/unlock either front door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.

 

Master Door Lock Switch

Childproof Door Locks

 

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock

Unlock

position, and close the door.

Lock

■ When opening the door

Open the door using the outside door handle.

 

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

Controls

165

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls

 

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode
All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Auto Door Unlocking
Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
* Not available on all models
Tailgate

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.

Models without power tailgate

 

Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.

Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
All models

 

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:

u Avoid possible damage.

u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 86
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured.

Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.

Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate.

When you are storing or picking up cargo from the cargo area, or by using a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*, while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 167

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

Controls

 

Outer Handle

 

Inner Handle

When all the doors are unlocked or you press the tailgate unlock button on the remote transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked.

Press the outer handle and lift open the tailgate.

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it.

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside.

If you close the tailgate when all the doors are locked, the tailgate locks automatically.

u Some exterior lights flash.

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

Make sure cargo or other items do not touch the tailgate support struts.

Tailgate Support Struts

1Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Do not leave the keyless remote, in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the keyless remote is within range.
Do not leave the keys inside the cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.
168

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate.

 

Tailgate

Unlock

Button

If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically.

 

Controls

169

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button in the driver’s side control panel, pressing the button on the tailgate, or by raising and lowering your foot under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*.

The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in P.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

WARNING
Opening or closing a power tailgate while any part of a passenger is in the tailgate’s operating path can cause serious injury.

Make sure all passengers or objects are clear of the tailgate operating range before opening or closing the tailgate.

NOTICE

Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is being automatically opened or closed.

Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while in operation can deform the tailgate frame.

When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if children are around.

The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions:

You activate the power system while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing.
The vehicle is parked on a steep hill.
The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind.
The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

* Not available on all models
TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Using the Hands Free Access*
Use a forward and back kicking motion for about 1 second under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the keyless remote.

 

u Some exterior lights flash and a beeper sound, then the tailgate begins to move.

 

1 sec.

1Using the Hands Free Access*

 

During rain or in other instances when the vehicle becomes wet, the sensor may not properly detect your foot motion.

When performing work on or around the rear section of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close the tailgate.

To prevent this from happening, select Customized Features on the audio/information screen and then select OFF for the feature.

Customized Features P. 369
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long or sweep your foot from side to side, the power tailgate does not open or close.

This function will not operate if you don’t have the keyless remote on you. Please make sure you have the keyless remote on you.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 171

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the power tailgate button for more than one second to operate when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

 

u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper sounds.

Power If you press the button again while the power

Tailgate tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Button

Press the button for more than one second,

and the power tailgate will reverse direction.

Customizing when to open the tailgate
Anytime: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting.

When Unlocked: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.

Customized Features P. 369
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

If you replace the 12-volt battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate.

Installing aftermarket components other than Honda genuine accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your cargo in and out.

The beeper sounds when you start driving while the power tailgate is still open, or closing.

* Not available on all models
TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Using the Power Tailgate Button
To open or close the power tailgate, press the power tailgate button for about one second. u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper

 

sounds.

If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press the button for about one second, and the power tailgate will reverse direction.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. The beeper sounds three times.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes.

Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate.

Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 173

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for no longer than one second, the tailgate opens automatically.

 

u The beeper sounds.

u If you want to open the tailgate

manually, press the button for more than

one second.

Outer Handle

2 Tailgate P. 167

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do

not have to unlock the tailgate before

opening it.

If you press the outer handle again while the

power tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press the outer handle, and the power tailgate

will reverse direction.

1Using the Tailgate Outer Handle

 

Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the keyless remote is within range.
Do not leave the keyless remote inside the cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.
You can change the power tailgate operation setting on and off.

Customized Features P. 369
174

Using the Tailgate Inner Button
Press the tailgate inner button on the tailgate to close the power tailgate.

 

u The beeper sounds.

If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will stop. Press and release the button again, and the power tailgate will reverse direction.

Tailgate Inner Button

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Controls

Continued 175

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Programming Tailgate Position
The extent to which the power tailgate automatically opens can be programmed.

 

To program:

Open the tailgate to the desired position.
Press and hold the tailgate inner button. You will hear one long beep, followed by two short beeps.

1Programming Tailgate Position

 

If the tailgate is only slightly opened, the position cannot be programmed, even if you push the tailgate inner button.

If you want to reprogram the power tailgate to open all the way, manually raise the tailgate to its upper most position and follow the directions step 2.

Tailgate Inner Button

176

TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Auto-Closer
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.

Power Tailgate Fall Detection
Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, by snow on the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers.

1Auto-Closer

The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is closing.

 

NOTICE

Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching.

Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.

1Power Tailgate Fall Detection

If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fall detection may activate.

Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion.

If the power tailgate fall detection constantly activates, consult a dealer.

Controls

 

177

Security System

Controls

 

Immobilizer System

 

This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the power system.

Pay attention to the following when pressing the POWER button:

Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the POWER button.
Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the POWER button.
Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.
Security System Alarm*

 

The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system.

However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.

When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.

1Immobilizer System

 

NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

1Security System Alarm*

The security system alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

* Not available on all models
Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm*
To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system, or turn the power mode is set to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met:

The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
The hood and tailgate are closed.
All doors and tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system.
When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.

To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or keyless access system, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

1Security System Alarm*

 

Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:

Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
Opening the hood with the hood release handle.
Models with power tailgate

Opening the tailgate with the power tailgate button on the dashboard.
If the 12-volt battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 179

Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm*
Panic Mode

Panic

Button

 

Controls

The panic button on the remote
transmitter

If you press the panic button for

approximately one second, the following will

occur for about 30 seconds:

The horn sounds.
Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter.
Set the power mode to ON.
180

Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows.

The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.

When the power window lock button is switched on (pushed in, indicator on), you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

Controls

 

Continued 181

WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

Auto Reverse

Controls

 

Auto-open/close function on driver’s window

 

ON

OFF

Power Window Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s

Window

Switch

Auto-open/close function on front windows

ON

OFF

Power Window

Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s Passenger’s

Window Window

Switch Switch

Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.

If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.

* Not available on all models
uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

Close

 

Open

To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

 

Opening the Windows with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and keep it pressed. If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.

 

Unlock

Button

1Opening the Windows with the Remote

Models with moonroof

If you open the windows with the remote, the moonroof will open automatically along with them.

Controls

Continued 183

WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls

 

Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the

key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to

the central position, turn the key in the unlock

direction and hold it there.

Close

Open

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.

Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the

central position, turn the key in the lock

direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows at the

desired position. If you want further

adjustment, repeat the same operation.

 

1Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key

 

Models with moonroof

If you open/close the windows with the key ,the moonroof will close automatically along with them.

184

Moonroof*

Opening/Closing the Moonroof

 

You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Using the Moonroof Switch
1Using the Moonroof Switch

 

WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on

Open

 

Tilt

Close

Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, pull or push the switch briefly.

Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.

Opening the Windows with the Remote P. 183
Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key P. 184
Controls

 

* Not available on all models 185

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

POWER Button

Changing the Power Mode

1POWER Button

 

POWER Button Operating Range

You can start the power system when the keyless

remote is inside the vehicle.

Controls

 

Without

pressing the

brake pedal

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

The button is off.

The power to all electrical components is turned off.

ACCESSORY

The button blinks (in red).

Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

ON

The button blinks (in red).

All electrical components can be used.

Operating Range

The power system may also start if the keyless remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

ON mode:

The POWER button is on (in red), if the power system is on.

If the battery of the keyless remote is getting low, the power system may not start when you push the POWER button. If the power system does not start,

Press the button.

refer to the following link.

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 645
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON

when you get out.

186

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button

Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the 12-volt battery.

Power Mode Reminder

If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds.

Controls

Continued 187

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button
Controls

 

Keyless Remote Reminder
When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF and you remove the keyless remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the keyless remote in another location.

 

When the power mode is in ACCESSORY The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.
When the power mode is in ON
An alarm will sound both inside and outside the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will appear on the instrument panel.

1Keyless Remote Reminder

 

When the keyless remote is within the system’s operational range, and all the doors are closed, the warning function cancels.

If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after the power system has been started, you can no longer change the POWER button mode or restart the power system. Always make sure if the keyless remote is in your vehicle when you operate the POWER button.

Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.

Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the keyless remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the keyless remote is within the system’s operational range.

188

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Turn Signals

 

(A) (B)

 

(B)

(A)

The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON.

(A): Turn signal
Push the lever up or down based on the direction you want to turn, and the turn signal will blink.

(B): One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push the lever up or down and release it, the turn signal will blink 3 times.

u If you lightly push the lever in the opposite direction while it is blinking, the blinking will stop.

1Turn Signals

 

The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will blink when the external turn signal blinks.

Indicators P. 90
Controls

 

189

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Light Switches

Controls

 

Manual Operation

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting.

 

High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams.

Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
1Light Switches

 

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened.

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

Indicators P. 90
Do not leave the lights on when the power system is off because it will cause the 12-volt battery to discharge.

If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

190

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON.

 

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.

The headlights come on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO.

u Once you lock the door, the headlights

will go off.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

Models without automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Models with automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Controls

 

Continued 191

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls

 

Headlight Integration with Wipers
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.

The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting

The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is at

Max

Bright

High

Mid

Low

Dark

Min

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
1Headlight Integration with Wipers

This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO.

The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

You can turn the headlight integration with wipers function on and off.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
192

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the keyless remote with you, and close the driver’s door.

If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

 

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
Controls

 

193

 

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
Fog Lights*

 

When the low beam headlights are on, turn

 

the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch

Daytime Running Lights

 

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:

The power mode is in ON.
The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF.
The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Auto High-Beam

 

The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.

 

Front Sensor Camera

How to Use the Auto High-Beam
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

The power mode is in ON.

Auto High-Beam

The light switch is in AUTO.

Indicator

The lever is in the low beam position.

Light Switch

The headlights have been automatically

activated.

It is dark outside the vehicle.
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on.

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
1Auto High-Beam

 

The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.

Front Sensor Camera P. 548
For the auto high-beam to work properly:

Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard.
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera.
Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

Controls

 

Continued 195

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When auto-high beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

 

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the

Controls

 

Switching to high beam:

All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
There are no preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are few street lights on the road ahead.
Switching to low beam:

One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/h) or less.
There is a preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are many street lights on the road ahead.

automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.

• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or

oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.

• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,

fog, windshield frost, etc.).

• Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,

electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating

the road ahead.

• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly

changes.

• The road is bumpy or has many curves.

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever:

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving.

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.

Using the light switch:

Turn the light switch to .

 

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a

vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or

oncoming direction.

• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.

• A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object

ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.

• The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under

roadside trees or behind median barriers.

• The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,

bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when:

Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.
The camera has detected dense fog.
196

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary.

To turn the system off:

 

AUTO Position

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever

toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds.

After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks

twice, release the lever.

To turn the system on:

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on.

Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.

Controls

 

197

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

 

Controls

 

Pull to

 

use

washer.

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring*

MIST

OFF

INT*1/AUTO*2

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.

MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1, AUTO*2, LO, HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.

Adjusting wiper operation*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.

 

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

NOTICE

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove the obstacle.

*1: Models with manual intermittent operation

*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.

 

The wipers operate intermittently, at low

speed, or at high speed and stop in

accordance with the amount of rainfall the

Adjustment Ring

rainfall sensor detects.

AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

 

Low sensitivity

High sensitivity

1Wipers and Washers

 

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

Rainfall Sensor

NOTICE

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 199

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Rear Wiper/Washer
Controls

 

INT: Intermittent

 

ON: Continuous wipe

OFF

Washer

Operating in reverse
The rear wiper and washer can be used when

the power mode is in ON.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

Washer ( )

Sprays while you rotate the switch to this

position.

Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the

washer. Once released, the washer spray will

stop and the rear wiper will return to its

selected switch setting after a few sweeps.

When you put the transmission into R with the windshield wipers activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation

INT*1 (Intermittent)

Intermittent

AUTO*2 (Intermittent)

LO (Low speed wipe)

Continuous

HI (High speed wipe)

*1: Models with manual intermittent operation

*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation

200

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

■ Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror* button to defog the rear window and mirrors* when the power mode is in ON.

Models without heated door mirror

The rear defogger and heated door mirror* automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes

depending on the outside temperature.

However, if the outside temperature is 32°F

(0°C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.

Models with heated door mirror

* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

 

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the power system is stopped. This may weaken the 12-volt battery, making it difficult to turn the power system on.

 

Models with heated door mirror

When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.

 

Controls

 

201

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls

 

Brightness Control

 

When the brightness of the meter will be Control Knob reduced, you can use the brightness control

 

knob to adjust instrument panel brightness.

Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.

Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

You will hear a beeper when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after adjusting the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.

Brightness level indicator

The brightness level is shown on the driver information interface while you are adjusting it.

1Brightness Control

 

The brightness of the instrument panel will be reduced when the following conditions have been met:

The power mode is in ON.
The parking lights are turned on.
The ambient lighting is low.
The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

202

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Driving Position Memory System*

 

You can store two driver’s seat positions (except for power lumbar) with the driving position memory system.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter or the keyless access system, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.

When you enter the vehicle, the driver information interface briefly shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle.

DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2

1Driving Position Memory System*

 

Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.

Customized Features P. 369
System Operation

The system will not operate if:

The transmission is out of the (P position.
Either memory button is pressed while the seat is in motion.
The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
Either of the memorized positions set fully to the rear.
The system may not recognise a key if:

The key is in close proximity to a mobile phone or other wireless device.
Both keys are in the vehicle at the same time.
The Driving Position Memory System is disabled in customized features.
Opening driver’s door without fully grabbing door handle.
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 203

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory

 

Controls

 

Memory

 

Button 1

Memory

Button 2

SET Button

Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired position.
Press the SET button.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory button indicator light will blink.

Press and hold memory button 1 or 2 within five seconds of pressing the SET button.
u Once the seat position has been memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on.

After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when:

You do not press the memory button within five seconds.
You readjust the seat position before the double-beep.
You set the power mode to any position except ON.
Recalling the Stored Position
1Recalling the Stored Position

Memory

 

Button 1

Memory

Button 2

Put the transmission into P.
Apply the parking brake.
Press a memory button ( 1 or 2).
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator light will blink.

The seat will automatically move to the memorized position. When it has finished moving, you will hear a beep, and the indicator light stays on.

The seat will stop moving if you:

Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or
(2).

Adjust the seat position.
Put the transmission into a position other than (P.
204

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. While the vehicle is stopped, pull the

 

To adjust

steering wheel adjustment lever up.

u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column.

Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.

u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

To lock

Lever

3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever

down to lock the steering wheel in position.

u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

Controls

 

205

Mirrors

Controls

 

Interior Rearview Mirror

 

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Flip the tab to switch the position.

 

Tab The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

Daytime Night

Position Position

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you. This feature is always active.

 

1Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

2 Front Seats P. 208

 

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.

Sensor

* Not available on all models
Power Door Mirrors

 

uuMirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Adjustment Selector

 

Switch Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

power mode is in ON.

Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

mirror.

Controls

 

207

Seats

Front Seats

 

Allow sufficient space.

 

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be

adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far

Move back.

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

1Seats

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

 

1Front Seats

WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Controls

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjusting the front power seat*

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Height Adjustment

Seat-back

Angle

(Driver’s seat only)

Adjustment

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration recommends that driver’s allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

* Not available on all models

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch*
(Driver’s seat only)

Press the top: To move the lumbar support up.

Press the bottom: To move the lumbar

support down.

Press the front: To increase the entire

lumbar support.

Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar support.

SeatsuFront Seats

Controls

* Not available on all models Continued 209

SeatsuFront Seats
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

Controls

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move

the seat, then release the

bar.

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

 

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

Height Adjustment

(Driver’s seat only)

Pull up or push down

the lever to raise or

lower the seat.

* Not available on all models
SeatsuFront Seats
■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

 

The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

 

WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Controls

 

211

SeatsuRear Seats
Controls

 

Rear Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Lever

1Rear Seats

 

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Pull up the lever to change the angle.

212

SeatsuRear Seats
Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats

 

Latch plate

 

Anchor buckle

 

Release Lever

 

Release Lever

Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 53

Lower the rear seat head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into
the seat-back.

From the rear seat side

Pull the release lever and fold down the seat.
From the cargo area side

Pull the release lever and fold down the seat.
The rear seat-backs can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the cargo area.

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat.

When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back.

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending through the opening into the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 69
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving.

Controls

 

213

SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls

 

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power system is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

214

SeatsuHead Restraints
Head Restraints

 

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Adjusting the Front Head Restraints
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear-impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant’s ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.

 

Position head in the center

of the head restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

 

1Adjusting the Front Head Restraints

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

In order for the head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.
Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper location.
Controls

 

Continued 215

SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls

 

Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Position
A passenger sitting in the rear seat should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving.

 

To raise the head restraint:

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Push it down while pressing the release button.

Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint:

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

 

WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

216

Armrest

Using the Front Seat Armrest

The console lid can be used as an armrest.

 

To adjust:

Slide the armrest to a desired position.

Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

 

SeatsuArmrest

Controls

217

Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

 

Models without moonroof

Front

Off

Controls

Door Activated Position

Models with moonroof

Front

Off

On

Door Activated Position

All models

Rear

On

Off

Door Activated Position

218

 

ON
The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following situations:

When any doors are opened.
You unlock the driver’s door.
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.

The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations:

When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.

Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 140
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 369
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:

When you lock the driver’s door.
When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode.
When you set the power mode to ON.
To avoid draining the 12-volt battery, do not leave the interior light on for an extended length of time when the power system is off.

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Map Light Switches
The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.

 

1Map Light Switches

 

When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lenses.

 

Cargo Area Lights
The cargo area lights comes on when you open the tailgate.

 

1Cargo Area Lights

The cargo area lights do not have an on/off switch. In case the tailgate is left open for an extended period of time, they automatically go out in 30 minutes.

Controls

219

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls

 

Storage Items

 

Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box. You

Handle

can lock the glove box with the built-in key.

To lock

Glove

Box

 

1Glove Box

 

WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

220

Center Console Box
You can change the position of the tray by sliding it forward or back.

 

Tray

If you want to make greater use of the console

 

Knob

box:

Pull the knob to open the armrest.
Slide the tray back.
3. Hold the front of the tray and pull it up.

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Controls

Continued 221

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls

 

Beverage Holders
Front seat beverage holders

Are located in the console between the front seats.

Rear seat beverage holders

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.

1Beverage Holders

 

NOTICE

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

222

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Front ■ Door side beverage holders

 

Located in the side pockets of all doors.

 

Rear

Controls

Continued 223

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls

 

Coat Hook
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle. Pull it down to use it.

 

Tie-down Anchors
The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items.

 

Anchors

Anchors

1Coat Hook

 

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

1Tie-down Anchors

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have to brake hard.

224

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Cargo Hook
The cargo hook on the driver’s side of the cargo area can be used to hang light items.

 

1Cargo Hook

 

NOTICE

Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs more than 6 lbs (3 kg) on the cargo hook. Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the hook.

 

Hook

Controls

Continued 225

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Sunglasses Holder

Press

 

Controls

 

To open the sunglasses holder, press and release the indent. To close, press it again until it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.

Conversation mirror
The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror. Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it back to the first detent.

You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.

1Sunglasses Holder

 

Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.

226

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Rear Cargo Cover

Handle

 

Mounting Rod

Hook

The rear cargo cover can be used to conceal items in the cargo area and protect them from direct sunlight.

To extend:
Lift up on the handle at the center edge of the cover to unhook each end, then pull the cover rearward and clip the mounting rods in the hooks at both sides of the tailgate opening.

1Rear Cargo Cover

 

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have to brake hard.

Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat in the cargo area. They could block your view and be thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.

To prevent rear cargo cover damage:

Do not place items on the rear cargo cover.
Do not put weight on the rear cargo cover.
Be sure that each mounting rod sets in its respective retention groove when you retract the rear cargo cover. If they are not set in the grooves, the rods may rattle as they contact the surrounding surfaces.

Controls

 

Continued 227

Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Mounting Rod ■ To retract:

 

Slip the rods out of the hooks, then slowly roll

it back until it is completely retracted.

Hook

 

Controls

To remove:

Push either end of the housing inward, then

lift it out of its position.

228

Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Other Interior Convenience Items

Accessory Power Socket

The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.

Accessory power socket in the center console box

Slide the tray back and open the cover to use it.

1Accessory Power Socket

 

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

This can overheat the accessory power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent 12-volt battery drain, only use the accessory power socket with the power system on.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the accessory power socket.

Controls

 

Continued 229

Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Wireless Charger*
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:

1Wireless Charger*

 

CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad

Controls

 

(Power) Button

 

Green Indicator

Amber Indicator

Charging Area

To turn the system on and off, press and hold the (power) button.
u When the system is activated, the green indicator light comes on.

Place the device you want to charge on the charging area.
u The system will automatically start charging the device, and the amber indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible

with the system, and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.

When charging is completed, the green indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber indicator light will stay on.

and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you.

Always remove foreign objects from the charge pad before charging the device.
Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.
Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.
Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.
Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.
Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the power system is off. This may weaken the 12-volt battery, making it difficult to turn the power system on.

When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

* Not available on all models
Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator

Cause

Solution

There is an obstacle(s) between

Remove the

the charging area and the

obstacle(s).

Green

Blinking

device.

&

simulta-

Pick up and reset the

Amber

neously

The device is not within the

device to the center of

charging area.

the charging area

where

is located.

Amber

Blinking

The wireless charger is faulty.

Contact a dealer for

repairs.

 

1Wireless Charger*

 

NOTICE

Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging.

The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also, precision machines such as watches may malfunction.

“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:

The device is already fully charged.
The temperature of the device is extremely high while charging.
You are at a place that emits strong electromagnetic waves or noises such as TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when:

All the doors or the tailgate are closed
to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the keyless access system.
The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 231

Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls

 

FCC statement RF Exposure Notice:
This wireless charger complies with FCC RF exposure guidelines at the distance of 3.94 inches (10 cm).

Keep a distance of at least 3.94 inches (10 cm) between all occupants and the wireless charger when charging.

Don’t remove the wireless charger yourself; contact a dealer for assistance.

Wireless

Wireless Charger

Charger

All Around

3.94 inches

3.94 inches

(10 cm)

(10 cm)

All Around

3.94 inches (10 cm)

All Around

3.94 inches

Wireless

(10 cm)

Charger

 

1Wireless Charger*

 

appears on the audio/information screen when the device is being charged by the wireless charger.

FCC statement

This product complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communication Commission), described below:

This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC rules. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used per the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

In order to use safely:

Remove any metal objects from the charge pad before charging a device.
Do not open the charger case.
Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact a dealer.
If the charger interferes with radio communications, attempt to correct the interference:

Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few seconds to turn off the charger.
* Not available on all models
Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Heated Steering Wheel*
The heated steering wheel can be used when the power mode is in ON.

 

Press the button on the right side of the steering wheel.

When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the power system, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Heated Steering Wheel*

 

Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-volt battery may be weakened, making the power system difficult to start.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 233

Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Seat Heaters*
The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.

 

Press the seat heater button:

 

Once – The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice – The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times – The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times – The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.

1Seat Heaters*

 

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lowerlimb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-volt battery may be weakened, making the power system difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the seat heater will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

* Not available on all models
Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control

 

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Models without SYNC button

 

AUTO Button

(ON/OFF) Button

Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Air flows from

Air flows from

Air flows from

Air flows from

dashboard

floor and

floor vents.

floor and

vents, and

dashboard

windshield

back of the

vents, and

defroster

center

back of the

vents.

console.

center

console.

Controls

 

Continued 235

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls

 

Models with SYNC button

Fan Control Buttons

Driver’s Side Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

(ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button

Air flows

Air flows

Air flows

Air flows

from

from floor

from floor

from floor

dashboard

and

vents.

and

vents, and

dashboard

windshield

back of the

vents, and

defroster

center

back of the

vents.

console.

center

console.

 

CLIMATE Button

Passenger’s Side

Temperature Control Dial

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

236

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Use the system when the power system is on.

Press the AUTO button.
Models without SYNC button

 

Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
Models with SYNC button

 

Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control dial.
All models

 

3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

 

Models with SYNC button

Press the CLIMATE button to display A/C, MODE, and fan control information on the audio/information screen to operate manually. Select icon to turn On or Off A/C, change the vent mode, or change the fan speed.

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority.

All models

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that were pressed will be controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.

While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.

Controls

 

Continued 237

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls

 

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) or (fresh air) button to switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.

Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.

Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Models without SYNC button

Pressing the

(windshield defroster) button

turns the air conditioning system on and

automatically switches the system to fresh air

mode.

Press the

button again to turn off, the

system returns to the previous settings.

 

Models with SYNC button

 

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

 

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

238

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

To rapidly defrost the windows

Models without SYNC button

1. Press the

button.

 

2. Press the button.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

 

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

 

Models with SYNC button

 

Controls

Continued 239

 

Controls

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Synchronization Mode*

1Synchronization Mode*

When you press the

button, the system changes

to synchronization mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side

temperature and the passenger’s side temperature

can be set separately.

 

Driver’s Side

Passenger’s

Temperature

Side

Control Dial

Temperature

Control Dial

SYNC

Button

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s side in synchronization mode.

Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronization mode.

Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

* Not available on all models
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

 

The automatic climate control system is

Sensor

equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill

any liquid on them.

 

Sensor

Controls

 

241

This page intentionally left blank.

242

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System

Playing Bluetooth® Audio……………..

268

About Your Audio System…………….

244

Siri® Eyes Free …………………………….

271

USB Port(s)

245

Models with Display Audio

………AudioSystemTheftProtection

247

Audio System Basic Operation

Audio Remote Controls………………..

248

Audio/Information Screen …………….

273

Models with color audio system

Adjusting the Sound ……………………

294

Audio System Basic Operation

Display Setup ……………………………..

295

Audio/Information Screen …………….

252

Voice Control Operation ………………

297

Adjusting the Sound ……………………

256

Playing AM/FM Radio…………………..

301

Display Setup ……………………………..

257

Playing SiriusXM® Radio ……………….

305

Playing AM/FM Radio …………………..

258

Playing an iPod …………………………..

312

Playing an iPod …………………………..

260

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)………………….

315

Playing Pandora®…………………………

263

Playing Pandora® ………………………..

319

Playing a USB Flash Drive ……………..

265

Playing a USB Flash Drive ……………..

321

Playing Bluetooth® Audio 324

HondaLink® 326

Wi-Fi Connection 331

Siri® Eyes Free 332

Apple CarPlayTM 333

Android AutoTM 336

Audio Error Messages 340

General Information on the Audio

System 345

Customized Features 362, 369

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*.. 395

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® 398, 422

Compass* 456

* Not available on all models 243

Audio System

Features

 

About Your Audio System

 

The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service*. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.

 

iPod

USB Flash Drive

Remote Controls

1About Your Audio System

 

SiriusXM® Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio*, contact a dealer.

General Information on the Audio System P. 345
SiriusXM® Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM®* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

iPod®, iPhone® and iTunes® are trademarks of Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

* Not available on all models
Audio SystemuUSB Port(s)
USB Port(s)

 

Install the USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port.

■ On the front of the center console

On the front of the center console

USB Port (1.0A)

*1

The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files

on a USB flash drive, connecting a cellular

phone, and charging devices.

*2

USB Port (1.5A)*

The USB port (1.5A) is for charging devices,

playing audio files and connecting compatible

phones with Apple CarPlayTM or Android

AutoTM.

u To prevent any potential issues, be sure

to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning

Connector for Apple CarPlayTM, and for

Android AutoTM, the USB cables should

be certified by USB-IF to be compliant

with USB 2.0 Standard.

 

*1: Models with color audio system

*2: Models with Display Audio

1USB Port(s)

 

Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.

The USB port can supply up to 1.5A/2.5A of power. It does not output 1.5A/2.5A unless the device requests.

For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise to the radio station you are listening to.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 245

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

■ On the back of the center console*

On the back of the center console

The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging

devices.

u You cannot play music even if you have

connected music players to them.

 

Features

* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection

 

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Turn on the audio system.

3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a

connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize

the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

 

Features

247

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls

 

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface.

1Audio Remote Controls

 

Some modes appear only when an appropriate

ENTER Button

 

Button Button
Button

4 Button

3 4 Buttons

(+ (- Bar

Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio

mode as follows:

Models with color audio system

FM1

FM2

AM

USB/iPod

Pandora®

Bluetooth® Audio

 

Models with Display Audio

 

device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.

Press the (Hang-up/back) button to go back to the previous command or cancel a command.

Press the (Display/information) button to switch

Features

 

(Display/Information) FM AM SiriusXM® USB iPod

Button Bluetooth® Audio Pandora® Apps

Audio Apps

Models with Display Audio

 

ENTER Button

When listening to a USB flash drive
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the folder list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.
Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in that folder.
Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.
display.

Switching the Display P. 128
248

When listening to an iPod
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the iPod music list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a category.
Press ENTER to display a list of items in the category.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4 repeatedly until the desired mode you want to listen to is displayed.

When listening to Pandora®
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the station list.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the track list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.
– (Volume) Bar
Press +: To increase the volume.

Press -: To decrease the volume.

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

Continued 249

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features

 

Buttons

When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.

Press : To select the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold : To select the next strong station.

Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio* Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

When listening to Pandora®
Press : To skip to the next track.

Press and hold : To select the next station.

Press and hold : To select the previous station.

* Not available on all models
MENU/

CLOCK

Button

Selector Knob

(Sound) Button

(Day/Night) Button

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with color audio system

 

To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK

 

button to access some audio functions.

1Audio System Basic Operation

 

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

(Back)

Button

 

Menu Display

Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.

 

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection.

 

MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any mode.

The available modes include wallpaper, display, clock, language setup, and play modes. Play mode choices include scan, random, repeat, and so on.

Menu Items

Adjust Clock P. 150
Wallpaper Setup P. 254
Display Setup P. 257
Customized Features P. 362
Press the buttons on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.

Audio Remote Controls P. 248
Features

 

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.

(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.

(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen

 

brightness.

Press the

button, then adjust the brightness using

.

u Each time you press the

button, the mode switches between the daytime

mode, nighttime mode and off mode.

 

251

 

Features

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display

Audio/Information Screen

Audio

Clock/Wallpaper

252

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio
Shows the current audio information.

Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

Change display
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .

u If you want to return to the audio/information screen, select Audio.

Features

Continued 253

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press
.

Rotate to select Import, then press . u The picture name is displayed on the list.
Rotate to select a desired picture, then press .
u The selected picture is displayed.

Press to save the picture.
Press to select OK.
Rotate to select a location to save the picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

 

1Wallpaper Setup

 

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the error message appears.
The wallpaper setup is limited while driving.
254

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Select, then press .

u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
To view wallpaper once it is set

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Press the (Back) button until the top screen is displayed.

Delete wallpaper
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .

u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

Features

 

255

Audio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound

 

(Sound) Button

 

Selector Knob

 

MID is selectable.

 

Press the (Sound) button, and rotate to scroll through the following choices:

BAS

Bass

 

1Adjusting the Sound

 

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Features

MID

Middle

TRE

Treble

FAD

Fader

BAL

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive

Volume Compensation

Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then

press .

 

256

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Display Adjustment, then press .
Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.

Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.

Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Color Theme, then press .
Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

Features

 

257

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio

 

Features

 

RADIO Button

Press to select a band.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to tune the radio

frequency.

Press, and then turn to select an

item. After that, press again to

make your selection.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to search up and down

the selected band for a station with a strong

signal.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.

258

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select the station, then press .

Update List

Updates your available station list at any time.

Press while listening to an FM station.
Rotate to select Update List, then press .

Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press .

 

1Playing AM/FM Radio

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6 stations each.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the audio source selecting buttons on the steering wheel.

Audio Remote Controls P. 248
1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

 

259

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod

 

Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Port(s) P. 245

Features

 

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod is connected.

Album Art

MEDIA Button

Press to select iPod

(if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Play Button

Pause Button

Press to resume a

Play Mode Buttons

song.

Press to pause a

song.

Press to select a play mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to change songs.

Press, and then turn to select

an item. After that, press

again to make your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu

items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the

previous display or cancel a

setting.

260

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the iPod music list.

Category

Selection

2. Rotate to select a category.

Item

Selection

Press to display a list of items in the category.
Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is
displayed.

 

1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 340
Features

 

Continued 261

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.

Available mode icons appear above the play

 

mode buttons.

Press the button corresponding to the mode

you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or podcasts, audiobooks, and composers) in random order.

Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, podcasts, audiobooks, and composers) in random order.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

262

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Playing Pandora®

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.

Phone Setup P. 404
USB Port(s) P. 245

MEDIA Button

Press to select Pandora®.

1Playing Pandora®

 

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app

 

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to change a

station.

Press, and then turn to

select an item. After

that, press again to

make your selection.

must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, tracks, comedians or composers and Pandora® will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

Features

MENU/CLOCK Button

(Skip) Button

Press to display the menu

items.

Press

to skip a track.

Play/Pause Button

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous

Select to resume or play a track.

display or cancel a setting.

Like/Dislike Buttons

Bookmark Button

Select to evaluate a track.

Select to set a track as a bookmark.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.

Continued 263

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features

 

How to Create a Station
You can create a station when playing Pandora®.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select New Station, then press .

1How to Create a Station

 

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

Pandora® P. 342
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.

To change stations, press on the main Pandora®

screen, and rotate to select Station List, and then select a new station.

Rotate to select an item, then press . u You can select Genre, Current Artist,
or Current Track.

 

264

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, AAC*1 or WAV format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

USB Port(s) P. 245

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Cover Art

MEDIA Button

Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6)

Press to select a play mode.

Audio/Information Screen

 

Features

Selector Knob

Turn to change files.

Press, and then turn to select

an item. After that, press again

to make your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu

items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Continued 265

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features

 

How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
Press to display a folder list.

Folder

Selection

2. Rotate to select a folder.

Track

Selection

Press to display a list of files in that folder.
Rotate to select a file, then press .

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 345
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 340
266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.

Available mode icons appear above the play

 

mode buttons.

Press the button corresponding to the mode

you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat

Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.

Random

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All: Plays all files in random order.

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Features

 

267

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 404

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

Features

 

MEDIA Button

Press to select Bluetooth Audio mode (if connected)

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in the Priority Device Setup.

Customized Features P. 362
VOL/

(Volume/

Power) Knob

Press to turn

the audio

system on and

off.

Turn to adjust

the volume.

Pause Button (Preset 2)

Press to pause a file.

MENU/

CLOCK

Button

Press to

display the

menu items.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

/

(Seek/Skip)

Buttons

Press

or

to

change

files.

Play Button (Preset 1)

Press to resume a file.

Selector Knob

Turn to change groups.

Press, and then turn to select

an item. After that, press again

to make your selection.

268

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

MEDIA Button

 

Pause Button

Play Button

Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some phones.

If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

 

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

To pause or resume a file
Press the Play or Pause button to select a mode.

Features

Continued 269

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the music search list.

Category

Selection

2. Rotate to select a category.

Item

Selection

Press to display a list of items in the category.
Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is
displayed.

 

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob

 

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

270

Audio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Siri® Eyes Free

 

You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 404
Using Siri® Eyes Free

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri® Eyes Free

While in Siri® Eyes Free:

The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

(Talk) Button

Press and hold until the display changes as shown.

(Hang-up/back) Button

Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

1Siri® Eyes Free

 

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri® Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri® Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

This audio system cannot operate the audio functions by using Siri® Eyes Free.

Features

 

271

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with Display Audio

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Audio Menu Items

(Home): Select to go to the home screen.

2 Station List P. 302, 304

(Home) Icon

2 Switching the Display P. 273

2 Music Search List P. 313, 322

(Map) Icon*

(Map)*: Select to display the map screen.

2 Scan P. 303, 311, 323

(Audio) Icon

2 Play Mode P. 314, 323

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

 

(Audio): Select to display the audio screen.

(Phone): Select to display the phone

screen.

(Back): Select to go back to the previous

screen when the icon is illuminated.

Features

(Day/Night) Icon

(Back) Icon

(Phone) Icon

 

(Day/Night): Select to change the audio/

 

information screen brightness.

Select once and select – or + to make

 

an adjustment.

u Each time you select , the mode

 

switches among the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and off mode.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display
Using the (display/information) button
Press the (display/information) button to change the display.

 

1Using the (display/information) button

 

You can edit, add, and delete the contents shown on the driver information interface.

Customizing the Meter P. 278

Features

(Display/Information) Button

Driver Information Interface

Continued 273

 

Features

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Using the audio/information screen

1Using the audio/information screen

Touchscreen operation

Home Screen

• Use simple gestures – including touching, swiping

and scrolling – to operate certain audio functions.

• Some items may be grayed out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction.

• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or

use voice commands.

• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

2 Customized Features P. 369

 

Select

to go to the home screen.

 

Select the following icons on the home screen.

Phone
Displays the HFL information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 422
274

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Info
Displays Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper, or System/Device Information. Select MENU on the Info Menu screen to see all available options:

Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper and System/Device Information.

Trip Computer:

Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete history on the History of Trip A

tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.

Voice Info: Displays the All Commands list.

Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper.

System/Device Information:

System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system.
USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.
Audio
Displays the current audio information.

Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.

2 Customized Features P. 369

Navigation*
Displays the navigation screen.

Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 275

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

HondaLink
Displays the HondaLink® screen.

2 HondaLink® P. 326

Smartphone Connection
Displays the Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM.

Apple CarPlayTM P. 333
Android AutoTM P. 336
App List ( )
Adds or removes apps or widgets on the home screen.

2 Home Screen P. 284

Instrument Panel
Selects from three customizable settings for the driver information interface.

276

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
Select .
Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home

screen.

 

Features

Continued 277

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Customizing the Meter
1Customizing the Meter

 

You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents on the driver information interface.

Settings
System
Configuration of Instrument Panel

Features

You can store up to three customized configurations. To select or customize a configuration, select Swap Config..

When you select Swap Config. during customization, the settings you changed will be saved.

When you select during customization, the settings you changed will not be saved and you will be returned to the Instrument Panel screen.

278

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Editing order
To change the order of the icons on the driver information interface, first select:

1. Edit Order

 

Edit Order

Select the icon you want to move.
u You will see arrows on both sides of the selected icon.

Select

Select the left or right arrow repeatedly to move the icon to your desired position.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

1Editing order

 

You can use an alternative method to change the order of the icons. First select:

Edit Order
Select and hold the icon you want to move.
Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

Features

 

Arrow icons OK

Continued 279

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Adding contents

1Adding contents

 

You can add icons to the driver information interface. To add icons, first select:

Icons that are grayed out cannot be selected.

Add

 

Features

Select

OK

280

1. Add

Select an icon you want to add.
u You will see a plus mark on the upper right hand corner of the selected icon.

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

If an icon has a plus mark in the upper-right corner, it means that the icon has already been added.

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Deleting contents
To delete contents on the driver information interface, first select:

1. Delete

 

Delete

Select an icon you want to delete.
u The icon with an X on the upper right hand corner can be deleted.

Select

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

1Deleting contents

 

You can also delete contents by selecting:

Delete or Edit Order
Select and hold an icon you want to delete.
Drag and drop the icon to the trash icon.
Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

Features

 

OK

Continued 281

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245

Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab.
Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.

Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

Select Start Import to save the data.

u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

The wallpaper you set up on Clock/Wallpaper Type cannot be displayed on the driver information interface.

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be fewer than 256 bytes.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.
After changing the screen interface design, you can change the wallpaper by following procedure.

Select .
Select .
Select and hold empty space on the home screen. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Change wallpaper.
Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
282

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper
Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Select .

2. Select Info.

3. Select MENU.

4. Select Clock/Wallpaper.

Delete wallpaper

Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or select .

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes.

Features

 

Continued 283

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Home Screen
To move to the next screen

Swipe

Icon

Icon

Current page position

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

1Home Screen

 

The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages.

Select to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

284

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To use apps or widgets

App List

( ) Icon

Select .
Select App List ( ).

u The apps screen appears.

Select the app or widget you want to use.
Preinstalled app list:

Calculator: Displays Calculator.
Downloads*1: Displays the data downloaded from the web browser and so on.
App Installer: Check with a Honda dealer for apps that are available for installation.
1To use apps or widgets

 

Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 394
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 394
In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may introduce data corruption risks to your vehicle’s information and your privacy.

You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Detail Information.
Select an App that you want to delete.
Select Delete.
Features

 

Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.

*1: Downloads app cannot be used because there is no Browser function in this system.

Continued 285

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
Select .

2. Select .

3. Select and hold empty space on the home

screen.

u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select and hold.

4. Select Add App or Add Widget.

u The apps/widget screen appears.

286

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select and hold an app or widget icon you

want to add.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Drag and drop.

Features

 

Continued 287

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

 

1To move icons on the home screen

 

You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel

icons in the same manner.

Features

 

Select and hold.

Drag and drop.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home screen.

* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.
Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization screen.

1To remove icons on the home screen

 

You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel

icons.

Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop to

trash icon.

Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the trash icon.
u The icon is removed from the home screen.

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 289

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Status Area
Swipe

 

Features

Status Area Bar

Swipe down from the top of the screen. u The status area appears.
Select an item to see the details.
Select or swipe up from the bottom bar to close the area.

290

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Changing the Screen Interface
You can change the screen interface design.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Change Skin.
Select Next, then a confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.

1Changing the Screen Interface

 

After changing the screen interface design, you can change the wallpaper by following procedure.

Select .
Select .
Select and hold empty space on the home screen. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Change wallpaper.
Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
If you change the screen interface, some of the setting items will change.

 

Customized Features P. 369
Features

Continued 291

Drag and drop

3. Select and hold the menu icon you want to add, then drag and drop the icon above.

4. Select OK.

To add

Drag and drop

2. Select and hold the menu icon you want to change, then drag and drop the icon to the bottom.

To change

Menu Icon

Select and hold

Menu Icons

You can change menu icons on the right side of Audio, Phone, and Info screen. 1. Select any of the three icons (Audio/

Phone/Info) on the screen, then select and hold the menu icon.

u Selecting the or icon, you can

change Audio, Phone, or Info on the Menu Customize screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Menu Customize

 

Features

292

1Menu Customize

 

You can also use the method below to change the menu icon:

Select Settings System Home tab Menu Icon

Position

 

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Closing Apps
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system.

Select and hold .
Select the Active tab.

u If you select the Active/History tab, you can close the apps that are currently running and delete the app activity history simultaneously.

Select an app you want to close.
Select Clear.
u The display will return to the app list.

1Closing Apps

 

If you have a number of apps running in the background and something goes wrong with the audio system, some of those apps may not work properly. If this happens, close all the apps and re-launch the app/apps that you want to use.

To close all apps on the system, select Clear All, then Yes.

You cannot close the HondaLink® and Garmin* apps.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 293

Audio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features

 

Adjusting the Sound

 

Select .
Select MENU.
Select Sound.

Select a tab from the following choices:

 

BAS-MID-TRE: Bass, Middle, Treble
FAD-BAL-SUBW*: Fader, Balance, Subwoofer*
SVC: Speed Volume Compensation
1Adjusting the Sound

 

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound by the following procedure.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select Sound.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Display tab.
Select Display Settings.
Select the setting you want.
Select OK.
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Display tab.
Select Background Color.
Select Next, then select the setting you want.
Select OK.

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

1Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

You cannot change the Background Color if you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

Continued 295

Audio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features

 

Selecting an Audio Source

Select the source icon.

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

1Selecting an Audio Source

 

If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is displayed on the screen.

These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the source select screen.

You can startup those audio apps from .

296

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation

 

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.

The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:

Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using.
The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands.

2 Voice Portal Screen P. 298

Close the windows and moonroof.
Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone on the ceiling.
Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
1Voice Control Operation

 

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side.

Features

 

Continued 297

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

Voice Portal Screen

When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen.

For a complete list of commands, say “Voice Help” after the beep or select Voice Help.

You can see the list of commands in Voice Info on the Info Menu screen. Select Info, then select MENU.

The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.

*1: Models with navigation system

Phone Call
This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change to the voice recognition screen for phone commands.

Dial by number
Call history
Redial
Call <Your Contact Name>
Call <Phone Number>
Call Police
Call 911
Phone Call commands are not available if using Apple CarPlayTM.

Music Search
This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected.

Climate Control*1
When the system recognizes the Climate Control command, the screen will change the dedicated screen to the climate control voice recognition screen.

Climate Control Commands*1 P. 300
Audio*1
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change to the audio voice recognition screen.

Audio On/Off
Radio FM/AM/SXM
PANDORA
iPod
USB
Other Sources
Pandora® cannot be used while Android AutoTM is active.

Navigation*1
The screen changes to the navigation screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

HondaLink
This can be only used when the phone is connected.

Voice Setting
The screen changes to the Voice Recog.

tab on the System Settings screen.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Help
You can see a list of the available commands on the screen.

Useful Commands
Phone Commands
Audio Commands*
Climate Control Commands*
General Commands
Music Search Commands
On Screen Commands
Useful Commands
The system accepts these commands on the voice portal top screen.

Call <Phone Number>
Call <Your contact Name>
What time is it?
What is today’s date?
*1: Models with navigation system

Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.

Call by number
Call by name
Call <Phone Number>
Call <Your contact Name>
Audio Commands*1
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.

Radio FM Commands
Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM

Radio FM preset # (#:1-12)
Radio AM Commands
Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
Radio AM preset # (#:1-6)
Radio SXM Commands
SXM channel <1-999>
SXM channel <channel name, category name, traffic and weather city name, sports team name>
Radio SXM preset <1-12>
Pandora® Commands
• PANDORA play

iPod Commands
iPod play
iPod play track # (#:1-30)
Music Search
What album is this?
What am I listening to?
USB Commands
• USB play

• USB play track # (#:1-30)

• Music Search

• What album is this?

• What am I listening to?

Bluetooth® audio Commands
• Bluetooth audio play

NOTE:

Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio devices.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 299

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

On Screen Commands
When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed.

Music Search Commands
The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen.

Using Song By Voice
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must press the (Talk) button and say: “Music search”.

Song By Voice Commands
• What am I listening to?

• Who am I listening to?

• Who is this?

• What’s playing?

• Who’s playing?

• What album is this?

*1: Models with navigation system

Play Commands
Play artist <Name>
Play track/song <Name>
Play album <Name>
Play genre/category <Name>
Play playlist <Name>
Play composer <Name>
List Commands
List artist <Name>
List album <Name>
List genre/category <Name>
List playlist <Name>
List composer <Name>
General Commands
What time is it?
What is today’s date?
Climate Control Commands*1
Climate Control On
Climate Control Off
Fan Speed <1-7>
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Temperature <57-87> degrees
Defrost On
Defrost Off
Air conditioner On
Air conditioner Off
More
Vent
Dash and floor
Floor vents
Floor and Defrost
Climate Control Automatic
Fan Speed up/down
Temperature up
Temperature down
NOTE:

These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.

300

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

 

Scan Icon

Select to scan each station with a strong signal.

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)

Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Tune Icons

Preset Icons

Audio/Information Screen

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed

information.

Seek Icons

Select or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

Features

 

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Select

or

to tune

Tune the preset radio frequency. Select and hold the

preset icon to store that station. Select

to display

the radio

frequency.

preset 7 onwards.

Continued 301

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features

 

Preset Memory
To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.

Tune to the selected station.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.

Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Station List tab.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Station List tab.
Select Refresh.
1Preset Memory

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or

select SOURCE on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 248
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

302

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or .

 

HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station.

Select MENU.
Select HD Radio Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.

 

Features

Continued 303

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features

 

Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the Station List tab.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the Station List tab.
Select Refresh.
Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

Select MENU.
Select View Radio Text.
1Radio Data System (RDS)

 

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

304

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Playing SiriusXM® Radio

 

Category Icons

Select or to display and select a

SiriusXM® Radio category.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each channel.

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

Skip Icons

Select or to change section in the channel. Select and hold to move rapidly within the section.

Channel Icons

Select or to the previous or next channel.

Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Audio/Information Screen

Station Art

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Preset Icons

Tune the preset radio station. Select and hold the preset icon to store that

station. Select to display preset 7 onwards.

Features

 

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Continued 305

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
To Change the Tune Mode
Select MENU.
Select Tune Mode.
Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.

Features

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio

 

In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or

select SOURCE on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 248
Tune Start:

When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off from the Audio Settings screen.

Customized Features P. 369
306

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Preset Memory
To store a channel:

Tune to the selected channel.
Press and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Select OK.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure.

Tune to the selected channel.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to five of your preferred music channels in total.

Tune a station.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number you

want to add a music channel.

u A message appears if there are no available presets.

Select Combine.
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio

 

You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

To store a multi-channel preset, you need to setup the Multiple Channel Mix Preset setting to On.

Customized Features P. 369
Features

 

Continued 307

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.

Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
Select the Channel tab.
Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
Select the channel.

1Listening to Featured Channels

 

Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.

Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.

Features

308

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Select MENU.
Select Playback.
Move the time marker to the position you want to replay.
The following items are available on the pop-up screen:

(Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. Select and hold to fast-rewind the current selection.

(Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection.

 

(15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-rewind the current selection.

 

(15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection.

u Select OK to close the pop-up menu. Replay in playback mode continues.

To play or pause on playback mode:

Select MENU.
Select Play/Pause.
Returning to real-time broadcast
1. Select MENU.

2. Select Go to Live.

1Replay Function

 

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

Audio/Information Screen

(A)

(C) (B)

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment

(C): Length stored in memory

Features

 

Continued 309

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features

 

Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from the games of your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Select Favorite Team.
Select a team.

To set up an alert message
Select .
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Select Interrupt.
Select On(One Time) or On(Continue).

1Live Sports Alert

 

The sports alert function is available in SiriusXM® mode only.

1To set up a favorite team

Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on. Selecting On(One Time) from the customize settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.

Customized Features P. 369
You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
310

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

To set up an alert beep
1. Select .

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Audio.

4. Select SportsFlash Setup.

5. Select Interrupt Beep.

6. Select On.

Traffic and Weather Information

You can receive traffic and weather information.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
Select the region.

u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unregistered.

Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.

Select Scan.
Select Scan Channels.
u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Song in Preset.

To turn off scan, select Cancel.

1To set up an alert beep

 

You can also set up an alert beep by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
1Traffic and Weather Information

The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM® mode only.

You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
1Scan

The “Scan Songs in Preset” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.

The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

Features

 

311

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod

 

Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.

USB Port(s) P. 245

Features

 

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed

information.

Song Icons

Play/Pause Icon

Select

or

to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

Cover Art

within a song.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

312

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Select MENU and select Music Search.

Category

Selection

Select the items on that menu.
1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 340
If you operate any music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

Select Switch USB Device in the Audio Menu screen to switch to another USB device.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlayTM, the iPod/USB source is unavailable and audio files on the phone can only be played within Apple CarPlayTM.

Features

 

Item Selection

Continued 313

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.

Select a play mode.

 

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list in random order.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list in random order. Repeat: Repeats the current track.

Features

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

314

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

 

Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands.

To enable SBV

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Song by Voice.
Select Next, then select On or Off.

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

 

Setting options:

On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands are available.
Off: Disable the feature.

Features

Continued 315

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features

 

Searching for music using SBV
Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
Press the (Talk) button and say “Music Search” to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod.
Then, say a next command.
u Example 1: Say “(List)‘Artist A’” to view a list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing.

 

u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’” to start

playing songs by that artist.

To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/ back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.

Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say “Music Search” again to re-activate this mode.

1Searching for music using SBV

 

Song By VoiceTM Commands List

Song By Voice Commands P. 300
NOTE:

Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.

You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.

Phonetic Modification P. 317
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlayTM. Use Siri® Eyes Free instead.

316

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Song by Voice Phonetic Modification.
Select New Modification.

1Phonetic Modification

 

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.

 

Features

Select USB or iPod.
Continued 317

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features

 

Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.

Select an entry to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. u To listen to the current phonetic

modification, select Play.

u To delete the current phonetic modification, select Delete.

 

10.Select Modify.

11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to

use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.

12.Select Done.

u The artist “No Name” is phonetically

modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV

mode, you can press the (Talk) button

and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist

A’” to play songs by the artist “No

Name.”

318

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Playing Pandora®

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.

Phone Setup P. 430
USB Port(s) P. 245

1Playing Pandora®

 

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the

audio screen.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to

the previous display.

VOL/

AUDIO

(Volume/Power

Station Up/

Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio

Down Icons

system on and off.

Select to change

Turn to adjust the

a station.

volume.

Cover Art

Audio/Information Screen

Like/Dislike Icons

Select to evaluate a track.

Play/Pause Icon

Select to resume or play a track.

Skip Icon

Select to skip a track.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, tracks, comedians or composers and Pandora® will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.

Features

 

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

If your phone is connected to Android AutoTM,

Pandora® is only available through the Android

AutoTM interface. Visit the Android AutoTM website to

check compatibility.

Continued 319

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features

 

Pandora® Menu
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio system. The available items are:

Bookmark
Station List
New Station
Switch USB device
Sound
Setting
Operating a menu item
Select MENU.
Select an item.

1Pandora® Menu

 

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

Pandora® P. 342
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.

To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.

320

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, AAC*1 or WAV format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Port(s) P. 245

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous

display.

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

Audio/Information Screen

VOL/

AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)

Open/Close Icon*2

Features

Knob

Displays/hides the detailed

Press to turn the audio system on and

information.

off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Icons

Folder Icons

Select

or

to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly within

Select

to skip to the next folder, and

to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

a track.

 

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Continued 321

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features

 

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Select MENU and select Music Search.

Folder Selection

Select a folder.
1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 345
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 340
Select Switch USB Device in the Audio Menu screen to switch to another USB device.

Track Selection

3. Select a track.

322

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

■ Scan

 

1. Select MENU.

2. Select Scan.

3. Select a play mode.

■ Random/Repeat

 

Select a play mode.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Features

 

To turn off a play mode
To turn off Scan, select or Cancel.

 

To turn off Random or Repeat, select the mode you want to turn off.

323

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 430

Audio/

Information

Screen

(Back) Icon

Bluetooth

Indicator

Select to go back to the

Appears when

previous display.

your phone is

(Audio) Icon

connected to

Select to display

HFL.

the audio screen.

Open/Close

VOL/

AUDIO

Icon*1

(Volume/Power

Displays/hides

Audio) Knob

the detailed

Press to turn the

information.

audio system on

Track Icons

and off.

Select

or

to change tracks.

Turn to adjust the

Group Icons

volume.

Select

or

to change group.

Play Icon

Pause Icon

*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in the Priority Device Settings.

Customized Features P. 369
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be different.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting Connect from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

Phone Setup P. 430
324

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 430

 

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To play or pause a file
Select the play icon or pause icon.

Searching for Music
Select MENU.
Select Music Search.
Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
Select an item.

u The selection begins playing.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth® settings on the Audio Menu screen by the following procedure.

Select MENU.
Select Setting.
1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Features

 

325

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

HondaLink®

 

HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 331
Phone Setup P. 430
HondaLink® Menu

Places*
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealers, etc. and provides navigation instructions to those locations via the navigation system.

Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

Help & Support
Displays tips on vehicle usage and provides information on roadside assistance and the customer service center.

1HondaLink®

The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, HondaLink® can only be connected through Wi-Fi.

 

* Not available on all models
Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

Weather*
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time.

To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to the HondaLink® service.

To enable the HondaLink® service
Select .

2. Select Settings.

Select Info.
Select the HondaLink tab.
Select Diagnostics & Location Data.
Select On.
To complete the procedure, you must consent to the collection and transmission of data pertaining to your vehicle.

 

Enable once: Allows only one time. (Prompt shows again next time.)

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

* Not available on all models Continued

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

Features

327

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
To link with HondaLink®
You can see this screen after launching

 

HondaLink®.

 

Features

328

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Using the shortcut operation, you can quickly gain access to new messages.

In the header area, a message appears to

notify you of a new message.

u When the message is received, a notification ring can be heard.

Message Icon

2. The notification message is replaced by an icon which remains displayed until the new message is read.

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

Features

Continued 329

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages.

Select a new message to open.
u If you have selected the update option for HondaLink®, follow the directions on the screen to complete the process.

1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

 

When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the engine running and maintain a constant connection with HondaLink®.

If the update is interrupted, the system will automatically resume the process. If, however, a week has elapsed since the process was first interrupted, you must repeat the process from the beginning.

You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message from Honda on the HondaLink® menu.

330

Audio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi Connection

 

This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi-Fi hotspot or communication device.

Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot
Select .
Select Settings.
Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi.
Select the Wi-Fi tab.
Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, select Next, then On.
Select Yes.
Select Wi-Fi Device List.

u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is

in access point (tethering) mode.

u Select the phone you want to connect to

the system.

u If you do not find the phone you want to

connect in the list, select Scan.

Select Add.

u If needed, enter a password for your phone and select Done.

u When the connection is successful, the

icon is displayed on the top of the screen.

 

9. Select to go back to the home screen.

 

1Wi-Fi Connection

 

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

1Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot

You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or

off with the icon on the Wi-Fi Device List screen. Network speed will not be displayed on this screen.

Features

 

331

Audio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Features

 

Siri® Eyes Free

 

You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 430
Using Siri® Eyes Free

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri® Eyes Free

While in Siri® Eyes Free:

The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

(Talk) Button

Press and hold until the display

changes as shown.

(Hang-up/back) Button

Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

1Siri® Eyes Free

 

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri® Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri® Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

332

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Apple CarPlayTM

 

If you connect an Apple CarPlayTM-compatible iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

USB Port(s) P. 245
Apple CarPlayTM Menu

Home screen Apple CarPlayTM menu screen

Apple CarPlayTM icon

Select the Honda icon to

go back to the home

screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlayTM Dashboard screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlayTM menu screen

Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

1Apple CarPlayTM

 

Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlayTM and when launching any compatible apps.

To directly access the Apple CarPlayTM phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlayTM, calls are only made through Apple CarPlayTM. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlayTM OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.

Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM P. 334
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlayTM, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlayTM is connected.

Phone Setup P. 430
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlayTM is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Features

 

Continued 333

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM
Features

 

Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Models with navigation system

 

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlayTM) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlayTM. Use of Apple CarPlayTM will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlayTM experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.

Enabling Apple CarPlayTM
Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)

 

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

1Apple CarPlayTM

 

Apple CarPlayTM Operating Requirements & Limitations

Apple CarPlayTM requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlayTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlayTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlayTM performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM

You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlayTM:

Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple CarPlay

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlayTM is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy.

334

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri®.

 

1Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®

 

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri®.

What movies are playing today?
Call dad at work.
What song is this?
How’s the weather tomorrow?
Read my latest email.
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

 

Features

(Talk) button:

Press and hold to activate Siri®.

Press again to deactivate Siri®.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

335

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM
Features

 

Android AutoTM

 

When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via the 1.5A USB port, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated. When connected via Android AutoTM, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android AutoTM, a tutorial will appear on the screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android AutoTM.

USB Port(s) P. 245
Auto Pairing Connection P. 338
1Android AutoTM

 

To use Android AutoTM, you need to download the Android AutoTM app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android AutoTM.

Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android AutoTM and when launching any compatible apps.

When your Android phone is connected to Android AutoTM, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android AutoTM is connected.

Phone Setup P. 430
336

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM
Android AutoTM Menu

6

: Go back to the home screen

Android AutoTM icon

a Maps (Navigation)

Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Models with navigation system

 

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android AutoTM) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

The audio/information screen shows you turn-by turn driving directions to your destination.

b Phone (Communication)

Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

c Google Now (Home screen)

Display useful information organized by Android AutoTM into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed.

1Android AutoTM

 

For details on countries and regions where Android AutoTM is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android AutoTM homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android AutoTM Operating Requirements & Limitations

Android AutoTM requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android AutoTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android AutoTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android AutoTM performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android AutoTM. Refer to the Android AutoTM homepage for information on compatible apps.

Features

 

Continued 337

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM
Features

 

d Music and audio

Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android AutoTM.

To switch between music apps, press this icon.

e Go back to the Home Screen.

Voice
Operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the 1.5A USB port, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated.

Enabling Android AutoTM
Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)

 

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

1Enabling Android AutoTM

 

Only initialize Android AutoTM when you are safely parked. When Android AutoTM first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android AutoTM settings after you have completed the initial setup:

Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android Auto

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android AutoTM is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

338

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM
Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

 

(Talk) button:

Press and hold to operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

(Hang-up/back) button:

Press to deactivate voice recognition.

1Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition

 

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:

Reply to text.
Call my wife.
Navigate to Honda.
Play my music.
Send a text message to my wife.
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android AutoTM homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Features

 

339

 

Features

Audio Error Messages

iPod/USB Flash Drive

 

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

USB Error*1, *2

Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is

compatible with the audio system.

A charging error has occurred with the

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn

connected USB device. When safe please

the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

check the compatibility of the device and

error.

USB cable and try again.*2

Unsupported Ver*1

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod

Unsupported Version*2

is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Connect Retry*1, *2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported

format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.

iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.

No Song*1

USB flash drive

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV

No Data*2

files in the USB flash drive.

iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported

device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

340

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

Error Message

Solution

Device No Response*1

Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears

when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.

HUB Unsupported*1

Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the

HUB.

*1:Models with color audio system

 

Features

341

 

Features

Audio Error MessagesuPandora®
Pandora®

 

If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.

If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Models with color audio system

 

Error Message

Solution

No Device Connected

Appears when no device is connected.

Check the Bluetooth® and USB connection.

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot

the app and reconnect the device.

To begin listening, select a station from the stations list.

Appears when any station is not selected. Select a station from the

station list on the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora®

to the latest version.

No station list on device.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to

Use device to create station.

create a station.

PANDORA system maintenance.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.

Unable to play PANDORA. When stopped, log-in to

Appears you do not log in to Pandora®. Log in to Pandora®.

PANDORA.

No network connectivity.

Appears when the network is deteriorated. Move the vehicle and

check the reception of the signal.

Appears when the sending the data is failed for ten times and the

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.

device may have a malfunction. Try again later. Move the vehicle and

check the reception of the signal.

342

Audio Error MessagesuPandora®
Error Message

Solution

Unable to play PANDORA. Music licensing restricts play in

Appears when the vehicle is in the restricted area to listen the music.

this area.

Move the vehicle and check the reception of the signal.

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. In order to have

Please check owners manual

any problems on a connected device, there is a possibility that the

audio system cannot be recognized the device. Contact a dealer.

Models with Display Audio

Error Message

Solution

To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device

to create a station.

Unable to rate track. Please try again.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the

predetermined number of times in an hour.

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.

Appears when the commanded operation fails. Try again later.

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot

the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA App version is not supported.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora®

to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again

later.

Features

 

Continued 343

Audio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Features

 

Error Message

Solution

Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.

Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install

mobile phone

Pandora® app to your device.

Models with Display Audio

 

Android/Apps

 

If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

 

Error Message*1

Solution

Unfortunately, **** has

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.

stopped.

App is not responding.

**** is not responding.

Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep

waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data

Would you like to close it?

Reset.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 394

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.

344

General Information on the Audio System

SiriusXM® Radio Service*

 

Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on the screen, select Channel 0.
Have your radio ID ready, and either call SiriusXM® or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Requested Channel Not Subscribed:

You are not subscribed to the channel selected.

Subscription Updated.:

SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

Channel Not Available:

No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.

No Signal:

The signal is too weak in the current location.

Check Tuner:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.

Check Antenna:

The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio

 

Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:

SiriusXM® Radio at

www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow

or 1-866-635-2349

1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:

In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle.
In tunnels
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
Large items carried on the roof rack
Features

 

* Not available on all models 345

General Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features

 

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

Models with color audio system

Model

Made for iPod (5th generation)

Made for iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)

Made for iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)

Made for iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)

Made for iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012 Made for iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012 Made for iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/ iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus

Models with Display Audio

 

Model

Made for iPod touch (6th generation) released 2015

Made for iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone SE/ iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/ iPhone XR

USB Flash Drives
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

 

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

346

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.

SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
Features

 

Continued 347

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
348

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations;
violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
Features

 

Continued 349

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation

HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
350

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings

Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
Features

 

Continued 351

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
352

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
E. Information Collection and Storage

Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
Features

 

Continued 353

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.

Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
354

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

Features

 

Continued 355

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer.

Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
356

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.

Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.

YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

Features

 

Continued 357

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.

This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

358

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM

Models with Display Audio

 

Legal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM

 

OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

Features

 

Continued 359

General Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM
Features

 

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

360

General Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
About Open Source Licenses

 

To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

Models with color audio system

 

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select License, then press .

Models with Display Audio

 

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Detail Information.
Select About device.
Select Legal information.
Select Open source licenses.

1About Open Source Licenses

 

Models with color audio system

LICENSE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor Standard Systems Inc.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Features

 

361

Customized Features

Models with color audio system

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup.

 

Audio/Information Screen

 

Features

(Phone) Button Selector Knob

MENU/CLOCK Button

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings:

Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Put the transmission into (P.
1How to customize

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select. Press to enter.

362

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customization flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

 

Adjust Clock

Settings

RDS Settings

RDS Information

Radio Text

Add New Device

Bluetooth Setup

Connect an Audio Device

Brightness

Display Adjustment

Contrast

Black Level

Camera Guideline

Rear Camera

 

Features

 

Continued 363

Customized Featuresu

Features

Display Change

Audio

Wallpaper

Select

Wallpaper

Import

Delete

Blue

Color Theme

Red

Amber

Violet

Bluegreen

Language

12h

Clock Format

24h

 

License

 

364

Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

 

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Priority Device Setup

Connect a Phone

Connect an Audio Device

Disconnect All Devices

Delete Device

Pass-Key

Speed Dial

Ringtone

Mobile Phone

Fixed

Caller ID Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

Auto Transfer

System Clear

 

Customized Featuresu

Features

Continued 365

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

List of customizable options
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Adjust Clock

Adjust Clock.

2 Clock P. 150

RDS Information

Selects whether the RDS information comes

On*1/Off

RDS

on.

Settings

Radio Text

Displays the radio text information of the

selected RDS station.

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

Add New Device

paired phone, and create a code for a paired

Bluetooth

phone.

Setup

2 Phone Setup P. 404

Settings

Connect an Audio

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®

Device

Audio device to HFL.

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/

information screen.

Display

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/

Adjustment

information screen.

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/

information screen.

Rear

Camera Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines come on the

On*1/Off

Camera

audio/information screen.

*1:Default Setting

366

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Display Change

Changes the display type.

Audio*1/Wallpaper

Select

Changes the wallpaper type.

Clock*1/Image 1/Image 2/

Image 3

Wallpaper

Import

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 254

Settings

Delete

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Image 1/Image 2/Image 3

Color Theme

Changes the background color of the audio/

Blue*1/Red/Amber/Violet/

information screen.

Bluegreen

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/Spanish

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to

12h*1/24h

24H.

License

Shows the legal information.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 367

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Add New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 404

Enables the system to or disables it from

Priority

automatically establishing a connection with a

On*1/Off

Priority Device

Bluetooth® device which has been assigned priority.

Phone

Selects the priority device over another paired

Setup

Priority

phone(s).

Bluetooth

Audio

Selects the priority device over another paired

Setup

Priority

audio device(s).

Connect a Phone

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 404

Connect an Audio Device

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

Phone Setup

Disconnect All Devices

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.

Delete Device

Deletes a paired phone.

Pass-Key

Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.

Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2 Speed Dial P. 413

Ringtone

Selects the ring tone.

Mobile Phone*1/

Fixed

Caller ID Info

Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number

Name Priority*1/

as the caller ID.

Number Priority

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

On*1/Off

phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

System Clear

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Phone Setup group as default.

*1:Default Setting

368

Customized Features

Models with Display Audio

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, select , and Settings, then select a setting item.

 

Audio/Information Screen

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and put the transmission into (P.

To customize features detail, refer to the following.

Customization flow P. 370
List of customizable options P. 378

Features

Continued 369

Customized Featuresu
Customization flow
Clock

Select Settings.

 

Features

Info

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Clock

 

HondaLink

 

Others

 

Default

 

Clock

 

HondaLink

 

Others

 

Default

 

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2

 

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone

 

Manual Time Zone

 

Auto Daylight Saving Time

 

Clock Format

 

Clock Display

 

Overlay Clock Location

 

Clock Reset

 

Diagnostic & Location Data

 

Info Screen Preference

 

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2

 

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone

 

Manual Time Zone

 

Auto Daylight Saving Time

 

Clock Format

 

Clock Display

 

Overlay Clock Location

 

Clock Reset

 

Diagnostic & Location Data

 

Info Screen Preference

 

Clock

 

Wallpaper

 

Clock

 

Wallpaper

 

370

Customized Featuresu

Camera

 

Bluetooth / Wi-Fi

 

Phone

 

Rear Camera

 

Cross Traffic

 

Monitor

Bluetooth

 

Wi-Fi

 

Default

 

Phone

 

Text/Email

 

Default

 

Fixed Guideline

 

Dynamic Guideline

 

Parking Sensor Display*

 

Default

Bluetooth On/Off Status

 

Bluetooth Device List

 

Priority Device Settings

 

Edit Pairing Code

 

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

 

Wi-Fi Device List

 

Wi-Fi Information

 

Bluetooth Device List

 

Edit Speed Dial

 

Ring Tone

 

Automatic Phone Sync

 

HondaLink Assist

 

Enable Text/Email

 

Select Account

 

New Message Notification

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 371

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Audio

 

FM/AM

 

SXM

 

Bluetooth

 

Other

 

Sound

 

Default

 

HD Radio Mode (FM)

 

HD Radio Mode (AM)

RDS INFO

TuneStart

 

SportsFlash Setup

 

Traffic & Weather Setup

 

Multiple Channel Mix Preset

 

Bluetooth Device List

 

Cover Art

 

Audio Source Pop-Up

 

372

Customized Featuresu

System Home

 

Home Screen Edit Order Menu Icon Position*2 Configuration of Instrument Panel Tachometer Setting

 

Display

 

Display Settings

 

Background Color*1

 

Touch Panel Sensitivity

 

Brightness

 

Contrast

 

Black Level

 

Blue

 

Amber

 

Red

 

Violet

 

BlueGreen

 

Features

 

Sound/Beep

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Guidance Volume

 

Text Message Volume

Voice Recog. Volume

Meter Volume – List Reading

Meter Volume – Alphabetic Reading

Verbal Reminder

Beep Volume

Continued 373

Customized Featuresu

Voice Recog.

 

One Press Voice Operation Voice Prompt Voice Recog. Volume Song by Voice

 

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification Phonebook Phonetic Modification Automatic Phone Sync

 

Features

 

Clock

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/

Clock

Clock Type*2

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone

Manual Time Zone

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Clock Format

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

374

Customized Featuresu

Others

 

Default

 

Language

 

Voice Command Tips

 

Remember Last Screen*1

 

Memory Refresh

Refresh Time Adjustment

 

Change Skin

 

Factory Data Reset

 

Climate Screen Timeout

 

Detail Information

 

Features

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

Continued 375

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Vehicle

 

TPMS Calibration

Cancel

Calibrate

Driver Assist System Setup

Forward Collision Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

Blind Spot Info

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Driver Attention Monitor

Meter Setup

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Alarm Volume

Reverse Alert Tone

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turn By Turn Auto Display

New Message Notifications

Speed/Distance Units

Driving Position Setup

Memory Position Link

 

376

Customized Featuresu

Smartphone

 

Keyless Access Setup

 

Lighting Setup

Door/Window Setup

Power Tailgate Setup*

Maintenance Info.

Default

Apple CarPlay

 

Android Auto

Remote Start System On/Off Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash Keyless Access Beep Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer Auto Light Sensitivity Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

 

Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Key and Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer Walk Away Auto Lock

 

Hands Free Access Function* Keyless Open Mode Power Open By Outer Handle

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 377

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

List of customizable options
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/

Clock

Wallpaper

Type*1/Clock

Wallpaper

Type*2

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone

Clock

Manual Time Zone

Auto Daylight Saving Time

See Info on P. 379

Clock

Clock Format

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

HondaLink

Diagnostic & Location Data

Others

Info Screen Preference

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Clock settings group as default.

*1:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

378

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/

Clock

Changes the clock display type.

Analog/Digital*1/

Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

Type*2/

Changes the wallpaper type.

Blank/Galaxy*1/

Clock

Wallpaper

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

Type*3

Metallic/Time Zone*

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Clock Adjustment

Adjusts Clock.

Auto Time Zone

Automatically adjusts the clock when driving

On*1/Off

through different time zones.

Info

Clock

Manual Time Zone

Changes the time zone manually.

Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust

Auto Daylight Saving Time

the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to

On*1/Off

cancel this function.

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on.

On*1/Off

Upper Right*1/Upper

Overlay Clock Location

Changes the clock display layout.

Left/Lower Right/

Lower Left/Off

Clock Reset

Resets the clock settings to the factory default.

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Features

 

379

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

HondaLink

Diagnostic &

Turns HondaLink® on and off.

On*1/Off

Location Data

Selects the top menu when the

(display/

Info Screen

information) button is pressed.

Info Top/Info

Info

Others

Info Top- A brief menu pops up.

Preference

Menu*1/Off

Info Menu- A full menu pops up.

Off- A menu does not pop up.

 

Features

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info settings

group as default.

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear

camera monitor.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 570

 

Yes/No

On*1/Off

380

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines adjust to the movement

On*1/Off

Rear

of the steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 570

Camera

Camera

Parking Sensor

Selects whether to turn on the parking sensor display.

Normal View/Split

Display*

View*1

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera

Yes/No

setting group as default.

Cross Traffic Monitor

Turns on and off the cross traffic monitor.

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Bluetooth On/Off Status

Changes the Bluetooth® status.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 430

Enables the system to or disables it from

Priority On/

automatically establishing a connection with a

On*1/Off

Off Status

Bluetooth® device which has been assigned

Bluetooth

Priority

priority.

Device

Selects the priority device over another paired

Settings

Audio

audio device(s).

Bluetooth /

Selects the priority device over another paired

Wi-Fi

Phone

phone(s).

Edit Pairing Code

Edits a pairing code.

Random/Fixed*1

2 To change the pairing code setting

P. 431

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

On/Off*1

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Device List

Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi device.

Wi-Fi Information

Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Bluetooth / Wi-Fi group as default.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 381

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or

disconnects a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 430

Edit Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2 Speed Dial P. 436

Phone

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile

Phone*1

Sets a phonebook and call history data to be

Automatic Phone Sync

automatically imported when a phone is paired

On*1/Off

Phone

to HFL.

HondaLink Assist

Turns HondaLink Assist on and off.

On*1/Off

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text/e-mail message function on and

On*1/Off

off.

Text/Email

Select Account

Selects a text or e-mail message account.

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

New Message Notification

screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail

On/Off*1

message.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone

Yes/No

settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

382

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

HD Radio Mode (FM)

Selects whether the audio system automatically

switches to the digital radio waves or receives

Auto*1/Analog Only

FM/AM mode

HD Radio Mode (AM)

the analog waves only.

FM/AM

RDS INFO

Turns on and off the RDS information.

On*1/Off

TuneStart

Turns on and off, starts the song from the

On*1/Off

beginning as you change preset stations.

Interrupt

Turns on and off the sports alert function.

Off*1/On(One Time)/

On(Continue)

Audio

SportsFlash

Favorite

Selects your favorite sports teams.

Setup

Team

2 Live Sports Alert P. 310

SiriusXM® mode

SXM

Interrupt

Causes the system to beep when the sports alert

On*1/Off

Beep

is notified.

Traffic & Weather Setup

Selects the region you want to receive the

information.

Multiple Channel Mix

Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.

On*1/Off

Preset

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 383

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

Bluetooth® mode

Bluetooth Device List

paired phone.

Bluetooth

2 Phone Setup P. 430

iPod or USB mode

[Your selected media]

Turns the cover art display on and off.

On*1/Off

Other

Cover Art

Audio

Selects whether the list of selectable audio source

Audio Source Pop-Up

comes on when Audio is selected on the home

On/Off*1

screen.

Sound

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 294

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Yes/No

settings group as default.

Home Screen Edit Order

Changes the home screen icon layout.

Menu Icon Position*2

Changes the position of the menu icons on the

Audio, Phone, and Info screen.

System

Home

Configuration of

Changes the Instrument Panel screen icon

Instrument Panel

layout.

Tachometer Setting

Not available on this model

 

*1:Default Setting

*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

384

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen.

Display

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information

Settings

screen.

Display

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen.

System

Background Color*2

Changes the background color of the audio/

Blue*1/Amber/Red/

information screen.

Violet/BlueGreen

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Low*1

Changes the sound volume.

Sound/

Guidance Volume

Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation

1~6*1~11

system.

Beep

Text Message Volume

Changes the text/e-mail message reading

1~6*1~11

volume.

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

Continued 385

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Meter Volume – List

Changes the list reading volume.

1~6*1~11

Reading

Sound/

Meter Volume –

1~6*1~11

Beep

Changes the alphabetic reading volume.

Alphabetic Reading

Verbal Reminder

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Beep Volume

Changes the beep volume.

Off/1/2*1/3

One Press Voice

Changes the setting of the

(Talk) button operation when

On*1/Off

System

Operation

using the voice operation.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

On*1/Off

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Voice

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.

On*1/Off

Recog. Song by Voice

Modifies a voice command for music stored in the system or

Phonetic Modification

an iPod/iPhone.

2 Phonetic Modification P. 317

Phonebook Phonetic

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Modification

2 Phonetic Modification P. 317

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically

On/Off

imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

 

*1:Default Setting

386

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/Wallpaper

Clock

Type*2/Clock

Wallpaper

Type*3

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone

Clock

Manual Time Zone

See Info on P. 379

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Clock Format

System

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

English (United

Language

Change the display language.

States)*1/Français/

Others

Español

Alerts you when manual control of the system is

Voice Command Tips

disabled to prevent distraction while driving.

On*1/Off

Only voice commands are available.

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

Continued 387

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Remember Last Screen*2

Selects whether the device remembers the last

On/Off*1

screen.

Turns on the audio system automatically and restores

Memory Refresh

the fragmentation of a memory when the power

On*1/Off

mode is VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Refresh Time Adjustment

Sets the time for Memory Refresh.

Others

Change Skin

Changes the screen interface design.

Yes/No

System

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

Yes/No

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 394

Changes the length of time the climate control

Never/5 Seconds/10

Climate Screen Timeout

display stays on when you press the CLIMATE

Seconds*1/20

button.

Seconds

Detail Information

Displays the details of the head unit and operating

system information.

Default

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the System

Yes/No

group as default.

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

388

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

TPMS Calibration

Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system

Cancel/Calibrate

(TPMS).

Forward Collision

Changes CMBSTM alert distance.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a

vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with

On/Off*1

Detect Beep

Low Speed Follow range.

Vehicle

Driver

Blind Spot Info

Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and Visual

Assist

Alert*1/Visual Alert/Off

System

Lane Keeping Assist

Setup

Causes the system to beep when LKAS is suspended.

On/Off*1

Suspend Beep

Road Departure

Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation

Normal*1/Wide/Warning

Mitigation Setting

system.

Only/Narrow

Driver Attention

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile And Audible

Monitor

Alert*1/Tactile Alert/OFF

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 389

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Adjust Outside Temp.

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Display

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A

When Refueled/IGN Off/

and average fuel economy A.

Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B

When Refueled/IGN Off/

and average fuel economy B.

Manually Reset*1

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,

High/Mid*1/Low

Meter

warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Vehicle

Setup

Reverse Alert Tone

Causes the beeper to sound when you move to (R.

On*1/Off

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Turn By Turn Auto

Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on

On*1/Off

Display

during the route guidance.

New Message

Used to select whether a pop-up alert comes on the

On*1/Off

Notifications

screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

mph · miles*1/km/h · km

*1:Default Setting

390

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Driving

Turns the driving position memory system on and

Position

Memory Position Link

On*1/Off

off.

Setup

Remote Start System

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

On*1/Off

On/Off

Keyless

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

Driver Door Only*1/All

driver’s door handle.

Doors

Access

Keyless Access Light

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you

Setup

On*1/Off

Flash

unlock/lock the doors.

Vehicle

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock

On*1/Off

the doors.

Interior Light

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

60seconds/30seconds*1/

Dimming Time

on after you close the doors.

15seconds

Headlight Auto Off

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

60seconds/30seconds/

Lighting

Timer

on after you close the driver’s door.

15seconds*1/0seconds

Setup

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto Interior

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

Illumination

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in

Min/Low/Mid*1/High/Max

Sensitivity

the AUTO position.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 391

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Lighting

Auto Headlight ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation

when the headlights automatically come on while

On*1/Off

Setup

With Wiper ON

the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

Auto Door Lock

Used to change the setting for when the doors

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift

automatically lock.

from P/Off

All Doors When Driver’s

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

Door Opens*1/All Doors

Auto Door Unlock

When Shifted to Park/All

automatically.

Doors When Ignition

Vehicle

Switched Off/Off

Door/

Key and Remote

Sets up the driver’s door or all the doors to unlock

Driver Door*1/All Doors

Window

Unlock Mode

on the first push of the remote.

Setup

Keyless Lock Answer

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

On*1/Off

Back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Security Relock

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock

90seconds/60seconds/

and the security system to set after you unlock

Timer

30seconds*1

the vehicle without opening any door.

Walk Away Auto

Changes the settings for the auto lock function

On/Off*1

Lock

when you walk away from the vehicle.

*1:Default Setting

392

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Hands Free Access

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a

swift forward in and out kicking motion under

On*1/Off

Function*

the rear bumper.

Power

Changes the keyless setting for when the power

Anytime*1/When

Tailgate

Keyless Open Mode

tailgate opens.

Unlocked

Setup*

Power Open By Outer Changes the setting to open power tailgate by

Off (Manual only)/

Vehicle

On (Power/

Handle

tailgate outer handle.

Manual)*1

Used to reset the maintenance minder

Maintenance Info.

information display when the maintenance

service has been performed.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle

Yes/No

settings group as default.

Smartphone

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlayTM connection.

Android Auto

Sets up the Android AutoTM connection.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models 393

Customized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features

 

Defaulting All the Settings

 

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Next, then select Yes to reset the settings.
Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select OK.

u After selecting OK, the system will reboot.

 

1Defaulting All the Settings

 

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.

HondaLink® P. 326
394

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

 

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

NOTE:

Some LED lightbulbs installed in the garage door opener can interfere with the training and consistent operation of your HomeLink device. Please consider use of Low RF interference bulbs in your garage door opener.

 

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

Features

* Not available on all models 395

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
Training HomeLink

 

If it is necessary to erase a previously entered

Red Indicator

learned code:

Press and hold the two outside buttons for

about 20 seconds, until the red indicator

blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to

step 1.

If you are training the second or third

button, go directly to step 1.

 

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800)355-3515.

 

Features

396

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Training a Button
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 – 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

NO

NO

YES

Press and release the HomeLink button. Press

3. Press and hold the

and release the button on the remote every 2

programmed HomeLink

secs.

button for about a sec.

YES

Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from

Does the device (garage

slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly

door opener) work?

blinking? The process should take less than 60

seconds.

YES

NO

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

1Training HomeLink

 

Retraining a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.

Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 – 3 under “Training a Button.” You do not need to press and release the HomeLink button again in step 2.
Erasing Codes

To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes

Features

 

Training

 

Complete HomeLink LED is constantly on.

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
The remote-controlled device should operate.

 

HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.

 

The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).

before selling the vehicle.

If you have any problems, see the device’s instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Training Complete

B.

Within 30 secs, press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

 

397

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

 

Models with color audio system

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

(Pick-up) Button

(Hang-up/Back) Button

(+ (- Bar

(Talk) Button

(Phone) Button

Selector Knob

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an incoming call.

 

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.

(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen.

Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

 

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528 -7876.

Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.

Speed Dial P. 413
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

398

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display

Battery Level Status

Signal Strength

Roam Status

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

HFL Mode

Call Name

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Features

 

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Speed Dial P. 413
399

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus

 

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Features

 

or

Speed Dial*1

Add New

 

(Existing entry list)

Call History

 

Phonebook

 

Phone Number

Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Call History*1

Dialed Calls

 

Received Calls Display the last 20 incoming calls.

 

Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls.

Phonebook*1

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Enter a phone number to dial.

Dial*1

 

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

400

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Redial*1

 

Phone Setup

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Priority Device Setup

Connect a Phone

 

Connect an Audio Device

 

Disconnect All Devices

 

Delete Device

Pair a phone to the system.

Set a priority device to the system.

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete a previously paired phone.

Features

 

Create a code for a paired phone.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Pass-key

 

Continued 401

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

 

Add New

Speed Dial*1

Call History

Phonebook

Phone Number

Existing entry list

Change Speed Dial

 

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Change a previously stored speed dial number.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Delete Speed Dial Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

 

Store Voice Tag Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

 

Change Voice Tag Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

 

Delete Voice Tag Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

402

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Ringtone

Mobile Phone

Fixed

Caller ID

Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

 

Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone.

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the caller ID.

Features

 

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL

Auto Transfer

when you enter the vehicle.

 

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,

System Clear

and security codes.

 

Continued 403

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone Setup

Features

To pair a cell phone (No phone has
been paired to the system)

Press the button or the button.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Rotate to select Yes, then press . u The audio system will enter a waiting
mode for pairing.

Select HandsFreeLink® from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, press and follow the prompts.

When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing .

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.

1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL.
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within 30 seconds, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

When pairing a phone from this audio system: If your phone doesn’t appear on the audio/ information screen, select Refresh and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink®.

404

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Rotate to select Add New Device, then press .
Press to select OK.

u The screen changes to device list.

Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.

When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, select Refresh and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone.

From your phone, select HandsFreeLink®.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by a phone.

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 405

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

Rotate to select a desired device name, then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

 

1To change the currently paired phone

 

To change the Bluetooth® connection priority device setting, select Priority Device Setup from the Bluetooth Setup screen.

406

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press

.

 

Features

Input a new pairing code, then press .

Continued 407

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a paired phone

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Delete Device, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

408

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Ringtone, then press
.

Rotate to select Mobile Phone or Fixed, then press .

Caller’s ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming call.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then press .
Rotate to select a mode you want, then press .

1Ring Tone

 

Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.

1Caller’s ID Information

Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook.

Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is displayed.

Features

 

Continued 409

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Automatic Transferring
If paring between your phone and the system is executed while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Auto Transfer.
Press to select On or Off.

410

To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select System Clear, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

A notification appears on the screen. Press
.

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 411

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

 

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile Other

Work

Voice

Pager

If a name has four or more numbers, … appears instead of category icons.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

412

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

 

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Rotate to select Add New, then press
.

Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press .
From Call History:

u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook:

u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook.

From Phone Number:

u Input the number manually.

When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.

1Speed Dial

 

When any preset button is pressed, the Speed Dial screen is displayed.

When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands.

Features

 

Continued 413

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To edit a speed dial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Speed Dial, then press .
Select a new speed dial number, then press
.

 

To delete a speed dial number

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

414

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

To change a voice tag

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

 

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

 

Continued 415

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a voice tag

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

 

1Making a Call

 

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

416

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press .
Rotate to select a name, then press .
Rotate to select a number, then press
.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

To make a call using a phone number
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Dial, then press .
Rotate to select a number, then press
.

Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

 

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 399
Speed Dial P. 413
1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 399
Speed Dial P. 413
Features

 

Continued 417

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using redial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .

3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using redial

 

Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone’s call history.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.

418

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a speed dial entry
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Rotate to select a number, then press
.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

 

When any preset button is pressed, the Speed Dial screen is displayed.

Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed dial list.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 413
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by

 

voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.

Features

Continued 419

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Receiving a Call

HFL Mode

Caller’s Name

 

Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the

call.

 

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.

Rotate to select the icon, then press .

420

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

To view the available options, press the button.
Rotate to select the option, then press
.

u Select Mute again to turn it off.

 

1Options During a Call

 

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

 

Features

421

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

 

Models with Display Audio

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

3 4 Buttons

ENTER Button

(+ (- Bar

(Display/Information) Button

(Talk) Button

(Hang-up/Back) Button

(Pick-up) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528 -7876.

To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, HFL is unavailable.

How to customize P. 369
Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag, a phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, select the audio system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
Up to three speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered.

Speed Dial P. 436
Up to three previous calls can be displayed at a time among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

422

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command.

 

(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.

3 4 buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

(display/information) button: Select and press ENTER to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Phonebook on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

To go to the Phone Menu screen:

Select to switch the display to the phone screen.
Select MENU.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

 

Continued 423

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

 

1HFL Status Display

 

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Battery Level Status

HFL Mode

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is

connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

Features

 

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Speed Dial P. 436
424

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus

 

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

Phone Settings screen

1.

Select

.

2.

Select

Settings.

3. Select

Phone.

 

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

 

Phone

 

Bluetooth Device List

(Existing entry list)

 

Add Bluetooth Device

Priority Device Settings

 

Connect

Connect a paired device to

Connect

the system.

Connect

Disconnect a paired phone

Disconnect

from the system.

Delete a paired phone.

Delete

Pair a new phone to the system.

Enable the system to or disables it

Priority On/Off Status

from automatically establishing a

connection with a Bluetooth® device

which has been assigned priority.

Select the priority device over

Audio

another paired audio device(s).

Select the priority device over

Phone

another paired phone(s).

 

Features

Continued 425

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

 

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

New Entry

Edit

Delete

Manual Input

Import from Call History

Import from Phonebook

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

Change a name.
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Delete All

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial numbers.

Ring Tone

Automatic Phone Sync

HondaLink Assist

 

Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected cell phone.

Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

426

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email

 

Select Account

New Message Notification

Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.

Select a text or e-mail message account.

Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.

Default

 

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

 

Features

Continued 427

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone Menu screen

1. Select .

 

2. Select MENU.

 

Speed Dial

 

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

 

Features

New Entry

 

Manual Input

 

Import from Call History

 

Import from Phonebook

 

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

 

New Entry

 

Manual Input

 

Import from Call History

 

Import from Phonebook

 

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

428

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Phonebook

Redial

Dial

Call History

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Redial the last number dialed.

Enter a phone number to dial.

All

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Display the last outgoing calls.

Dialed

Display the last incoming calls.

Received

Display the last missed calls.

Missed

 

Text/Email

(Existing message list)

Read/Stop

 

Reply

Dial

System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.

See the previous message.

See the next message.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

Features

Select Account

Select a text or e-mail message account.

Continued 429

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone Setup

Features

To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)

Select .
Select Yes.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Select HandsFreeLink from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this audio system, select HandsFreeLink
Not Found, Continue, and then select your phone when it appears on the list. If your phone does not appear, you can select Refresh to search again.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
u You can prioritize a Bluetooth® device at

the same time. Select Yes and then a device you want to prioritize.

 

1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system.
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM, pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is unavailable.

430

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the currently paired phone
Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Bluetooth Device List.
Select a phone to connect.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

Select Connect , Connect , or Connect .
To change the pairing code setting
Select .
Select Settings.
Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi.
Select the Bluetooth tab.
Select Edit Pairing Code.

1To change the currently paired phone

 

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

To change the Bluetooth® connection priority device setting, select Priority Device Settings from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

1To change the pairing code setting

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.

Features

 

6. Select Random or Fixed.

Continued 431

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a paired phone

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Bluetooth Device List.
Select a phone you want to delete.
Select Delete.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
432

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options
To turn on or off the text/e-mail

message function

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable Text/Email.
Select Next.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.
To turn on or off the text/e-mail

message notice

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select the Text/Email tab, then New Message Notification.
Select Next.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.
1To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options

 

To use the text/e-mail message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

Features

 

Continued 433

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Ring Tone.
Select Next, then select Fixed or Mobile Phone.

1Ring Tone

 

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Features

434

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Automatic Phone Sync.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Voice

Pager

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Select On or Off.
Continued 435

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

 

Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 428

Select Speed Dial.
Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:

u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input:

u Input the number manually.

From Import from Phonebook:

u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook.

When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No.
Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial

 

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name.

436

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.

Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial

 

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.

For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

 

Features

To delete a voice tag

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.

A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
Continued 437

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To edit a speed dial

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select a setting you want.
To delete a speed dial
Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.

A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
438

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.

To add a new voice tag
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

 

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

 

Select the phone you want to add phonetic modification to.
Features

Continued 439

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

7. Select [New Voice Tag].

 

Select a contact name you want to add to. u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.

Select Modify.
Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.
440

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To modify a voice tag
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to modify phonetic modification.
Select a contact name you want to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Modify.
Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

 

You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.

Features

 

Continued 441

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a modified voice tag
1. Select .

2. Select Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.

5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.

 

Select the phone for which you want to delete phonetic modification.
Select a contact name you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been selected.

Select OK.
442

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To delete all modified voice tags
1. Select .

2. Select Settings.

 

3. Select System.

Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.

7. Select Delete All.

You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select Yes.
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

 

1Making a Call

 

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say the voice tag name.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlayTM, phone calls can be made only from Apple CarPlayTM.

Features

 

Continued 443

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

Select .
Select Phonebook.

Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select Search.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering name, if multiple numbers exist select a number.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

 

You can also select Phonebook on the Phone Menu screen.

You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 436
444

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a phone number
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 428

Select Dial.
Select a number.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.

Select .
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using redial
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 428

Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed.
Go to the Phone Menu screen.

Phone Menu screen P. 428
Select Call History.
Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

 

You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 436
1To make a call using the Call History

The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

Features

 

Continued 445

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 428

Select Speed Dial.
Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

 

Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears.

 

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the

call.

 

1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry

 

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.

Speed Dial P. 436
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.

446

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

Mute Icon

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

 

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call

 

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

 

Features

Continued 447

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text or e-mail message.
Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text or e-mail message is displayed.

 

The system automatically starts reading out the message.

To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.
1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message

 

The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.

The system can only receive messages that are sent as text (SMS) messages. Messages sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text and e-mail message.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/ e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

When you receive a text or e-mail message for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On.

To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice P. 433
448

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Selecting a Text/E-mail Message Account
If a paired phone has text or e-mail message accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select the Text/Email tab, then Select Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Text Messages or an e-mail message account you want.

1Selecting a Text/E-mail Message Account

 

You can also select an e-mail message account from the folder list screen or the message list screen.

 

Select

Account

Features

You can only receive notifications from one text or e-mail

message account at a time.

Continued 449

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Displaying Messages
Message List

■ Displaying text messages

1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.

2 Phone Menu screen P. 428

2. Select Text/Email.

u Select account if necessary.

3. Select a message.

u The text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

Text Message

Features

 

1Displaying Messages

 

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone’s outbox.

To see the previous or next message, select (previous) or (next) on the message screen.

450

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

 

Message List

E-mail Message

Displaying e-mail messages
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 428

Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.

Select a folder.
Select a message.
u The e-mail message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

 

Features

Continued 451

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Read or Stop reading a message

Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

2 Displaying Messages P. 450

Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning.

Features

 

452

Reply to a message

Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

2 Displaying Messages P. 450

Select Reply.
Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

Talk to you later, I’m driving.
I’m on my way.
I’m running late.
OK
Yes
No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Making a call to a sender

Go to the text message screen.
Select Dial.

Features

Continued 453

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

 

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

1In Case of Emergency

 

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency service when:

You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage areas.
There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not be sent to the operator.

454

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To enable notification
Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 425

Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.

1To enable notification

 

Setting options:

On: Notification is available.
Off: Disable the feature.

Features

455

Compass*

Features

 

When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

 

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system.

Set the power mode to ON.
Press and hold the (day/night) button until the display shows the compass setting menu.
Rotate to select Calibration, then press

.

 

Compass Setting Menu Items

When the display changes to Push CAL Start, press .
Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator goes off.

 

1Compass*

 

Compass operation can be affected under the following conditions:

Driving near power lines or stations
Crossing a bridge
Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
When accessories such as antennas and roof racks are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration

Calibrate the compass in an open area. While setting the compass:

The (Back) button returns to the previous screen.
* Not available on all models
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection

 

Set the power mode to ON.
Press and hold the (day/night) button until the display shows the compass setting menu.
Rotate to select Zone, then press .

The display shows the current zone

number.

4. Rotate

to select the zone number of

Zone Number

 

your area (See Zone Map), then press .

 

Zone Map

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

1Compass Zone Selection

 

The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north.

If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed.

 

Features

457

This page intentionally left blank.

458

Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving 460

Towing a Trailer 465

Towing Behind a Motorhome 466

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

General Information 467

Important Safety Precautions 467

Avoiding Trouble 468

When Driving

Turning on the Power 469

Precautions While Driving 475

Transmission 476

Shifting 477

SPORT Mode 483

Deceleration Paddle Selector 484

ECON Mode 487

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System 488

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System 489

Agile Handling Assist 491

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control

SystemTM 492

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .. 493

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –

Required Federal Explanation 497

Blind spot information System* 499

High Voltage Battery 502

Honda Sensing® 503

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 506

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow 517

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .. 534

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 543

Front Sensor Camera 548

Radar Sensor 550

Braking

Brake System 551

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 557

Brake Assist System 558

Parking Your Vehicle 559

Multi-View Rear Camera 570

Refueling 572

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 575

* Not available on all models 459

Before Driving

Driving

 

Driving Preparation

 

Check the following items before you start driving.

Exterior Checks
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.

u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.

Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 606

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks

 

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

460

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

Maximum Load Limit P. 463
Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.

If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 163
Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.

Seats P. 208
Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 215
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 205
Mirrors P. 206
1Interior Checks

 

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Driving

 

Continued 461

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
Fastening a Seat Belt P. 51
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 90

 

Driving

462

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit

 

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Label Example

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit

 

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories and all cargo.

Specifications P. 668
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

Specifications P. 668
Driving

 

Continued 463

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving

 

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

550 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

100 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

(45 kg)

1Maximum Load Limit

 

Towing a Trailer:

See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.

Towing a Trailer P. 465
464

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.

 

Driving

465

Towing a TraileruTowing Behind a Motorhome
Towing Behind a Motorhome

 

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

Emergency Towing P. 663

Driving

466

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

General Information

 

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.

If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions

 

To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations:

Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 463

Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

 

WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off-pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner’s manual.
Keep your speed low, and don’t drive faster than conditions permit.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

Important Handling Information P. 44
Precautions While Driving P. 475
Driving

 

467

 

Driving

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Avoiding Trouble

 

Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation.
Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components.
Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
Crossing a Stream – Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
468

When Driving

Turning on the Power

 

Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on for 15 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

 

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Depress the brake pedal.

Brake Pedal

1Turning on the Power

 

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the power system.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When turning on the power system in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce 12V-battery drain.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the power system does not activate.

Immobilizer System P. 178
When you set the power mode to ON, you may feel as if the brake pedal is sinking down. This is normal.

Driving

 

Continued 469

When DrivinguTurning on the Power
Driving

 

Without depressing the accelerator pedal,

press the POWER button while depressing

the brake pedal.

4. Check the READY indicator.

u Keep depressing the brake pedal until

the READY indicator comes on.

u The READY indicator comes on when

the power system is on and you can start

driving.

u If the outside temperature is extremely

low, you cannot drive until conditions are

improved. In this case, the READY

indicator does not come on and a

warning message appears on the driver

information interface.

2 Driver Information Interface

Warning and Information Messages

P. 109

Stopping the Power System
You can turn the power system off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Put the transmission into P.
Press the POWER button.
1Turning on the Power

 

Bring the keyless remote close to the POWER button if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 645
The power system may not activate if the keyless remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the POWER button to start the power system.

If the power system does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again.

The engine may not run when the vehicle is ready for driving.

You can start driving with the READY indicator on. If you press the POWER button while depressing the brake pedal with the READY indicator on, the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF and you cannot start driving.

READY Indicator P. 93
470

When DrivinguTurning on the Power
Remote Engine Start
You can remotely turn the power system on using the keyless remote.

To turn the power system on

Press the

button, then press and hold

the

button.

Go within the range,

Some exterior lights flash once.

and try again.

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

Some exterior lights flash six Exterior lights will not flash

times if the power system if the power system does

starts successfully. not start.

The power system is on for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle. To extend the time for another 10 minutes during the first 10 minutes, press the button, then press and hold the button.

 

u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted successfully.

1Remote Engine Start

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

Driving

 

Continued 471

When DrivinguTurning on the Power
Driving

 

To turn the power system off

Go within the range,

and try again.

The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the keyless access system range.

The power system will not be turned off.

Press and hold the

button for one The exterior lights flash once if the power system off successfully.

second.

1Remote Engine Start

 

The power system may not be turned on by the remote engine start if:

You have disabled a remote engine start setting using the driver information interface* or audio/ information screen*.
2 Customized Features P. 140, 369

The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is unlocked.
You have already used the remote twice to turn the power system on.
Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.
There is an antenna failure.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The security system alarm is not set.
1To turn the power system off

The power system may be turned off while it is on if:

You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of turning the power system on with the button on the keyless remote.
The power system is turned off by using the keyless remote.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The hood is open.
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems.
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguTurning on the Power
1Remote Engine Start

While the power system is on, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside:

The climate control system is activated in recirculation mode.

When it is cold outside:

The defroster is activated at a moderately warm temperature.
The rear defogger and door mirror heaters* are activated.
The seat and heated steering wheel are activated*
2 Heated Steering Wheel* P. 233

2 Seat Heaters* P. 234

 

Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 473

When DrivinguTurning on the Power
Driving

 

Starting to Drive

When the power system is turned on using the button on the keyless remote

Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the POWER button.
When the power system is turned on in any case

 

Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, check that the READY indicator is on, then put the transmission into D. Select R when reversing.
With the parking brake is applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 551

Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. Put the transmission into D when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Starting to Drive

 

When the power system is turned on using the button on the keyless remote

The power system is turned off when the transmission is taken out of (P before the POWER button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

As a hybrid vehicle, the sounds and vibrations from the engine may be absent even though the vehicle is ready for driving. It also makes you fail to recognize that you can start.

Make sure to check if the READY indicator is on before you start to drive.

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

474

When DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Precautions While Driving

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss of control:

Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on roof.
Roof load capacity is 165 lbs (75 kg), available roof racks/carriers may have lower capacities. Please check accessory’s information (Honda accessory).
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving

 

NOTICE

Do not change the shift position while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored.

Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

Driving

 

475

When DrivinguTransmission
Driving

 

Transmission

Creeping

As with a conventional gasoline-powered vehicle with an automatic transmission, this vehicle will creep.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the vehicle to react similar to an automatic transmission vehicle, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

1Precautions While Driving

 

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not select (N while driving as you will lose regenerative braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km) after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

Important Handling Information P. 44
Precautions While Driving P. 475
476

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shifting

 

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift button positions

Park

Used when parking or turning the power on or off.

Transmission is locked.

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive

● Used for normal driving.

● The deceleration paddle selector can be used temporarily.

● The deceleration paddle selector can be

used when SPORT mode is on.

1Shifting

 

WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.

While the High Voltage battery level is full, or the High Voltage battery temperature is low, regenerative braking may become less effective.

To prevent malfunction and unintended engagement:

Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons.
Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift buttons.
Do not let passengers or children operate the shift buttons.
Driving

 

Continued 477

When DrivinguShifting
P (parking) button

(P Button

 

The shift position changes to P when you press the P button while the vehicle is parked with the power mode in ON.

The indicators on the sides of the P button come on.

1Shifting

The beeper sounds and the message appears on the driver information interface when you depress the accelerator pedal with the shift position in (N.

2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 109

Change the shift position to (D or (R with the brake pedal depressed.

You may occasionally find that it takes longer than usual for the vehicle to start moving when you select (R, release the brake pedal, and/or depress the accelerator pedal. This may occur when the High Voltage battery level is extremely low, and does not indicate a vehicle malfunction.

 

Driving

478

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Operation

Shift Position Indicator (Transmission System Indicator)

Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator

Press the (P button.

Press back the (R button.

Press the (N button.

Press the (D button.

Shift Button

Indicator

1Shift Operation

 

NOTICE

When you change (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift button before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift position indicator and the shift button indicator to check the shift position before selecting a shift button.

If the indicator of the currently selected shift position, or all the shift position indicators are blinking simultaneously, there is a problem with the transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

The beeper sounds once when you change to (R.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
Driving

 

Continued 479

When DrivinguShifting
When opening the driver’s door
If you open the driver’s door under the following conditions, the shift position automatically changes to P.

The vehicle is stationary with the power mode in ON, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) or slower.
The transmission is in other than P.
You have unfastened the driver side seat belt.
u If you manually change the shift position from P with the brake pedal depressed, the shift position will automatically return to P once you release the brake pedal.

When turning off the power mode
If you turn the power system off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in other than P, the shift position automatically changes to P.

 

1When opening the driver’s door

 

While the system is designed to automatically change the shift position to (P under the described conditions, in the interest of safety you should always select (P before opening the driver’s door. Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place.

When Stopped P. 559
If you want to drive the vehicle after the shift position has automatically changed to (P under the described conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt, depress the brake pedal, then change the shift position.

If you leave the vehicle, turn off the power system and lock the doors.

Driving

480

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

If you want to keep the transmission in N position [car wash mode] With the power system on:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

2. Press and release the N button.

u N (Neutral) hold mode will appear on the driver information interface.

3. Press the N button again and hold it for two seconds.

u The vehicle will enter car wash mode, which must be used when your vehicle is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an attendant do not remain in the vehicle.

If you want to cancel car wash mode, select a position other than N.

If the POWER button is pressed after car wash mode has been activated, the power mode will change to ACCESSORY and a message will be displayed on the driver information interface.

 

u For 15 minutes the transmission remains in N with the power mode will remain in ACCESSORY. After that, the transmission automatically changes to P.

u Manually changing to P cancels ACCESSORY mode. The P indicator comes on and the power mode changes to OFF. You must always put the transmission into P when car wash mode is no longer needed.

1If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode]

 

To keep the vehicle in (N position, you can also follow this procedure:

While the power system is on, select (N, and then within five seconds, press the POWER button.

Note that the transmission may not stay in (N position while any of the following indicators is on:

Transmission system indicator.
Malfunction indicator lamp.
Charging system indicator.
Driving

 

Continued 481

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Restrictions on selecting a shift position
You cannot select a shift position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.

 

When the

1. Under these

2. If you try to change to

3. The shift position

How to change the

transmission is in:

circumstances:

the following:

remains in/changes to:

shift position

The brake pedal is not

(P

depressed.

(P

The accelerator pedal is

depressed.

Release the accelerator

The vehicle is moving at low

Other shift position

pedal and depress the

speed without the brake pedal

brake pedal.

(N

depressed.

The vehicle is moving at low

speed with the accelerator

(N

pedal depressed.

(N or (D

The vehicle is moving forward.

(R

(R or (N

The vehicle is moving backward.

(D

Park your vehicle in a

safe place.

(R, (N, or (D

The vehicle is moving.

(P

A shift position other than

Make sure that the

(P or (N

The READY indicator is not on.

(P or (N

READY indicator

(P or (N

comes on.

482

uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode

SPORT Mode

 

SPORT Mode Indicator SPORT Button

 

To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.

The SPORT mode increases engine performance and handling.

This mode is not recommended for fuel economy enhancement, but suitable for driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.

The SPORT mode is turned off every time you turn on the power system, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

Driving

483

When DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector
Deceleration Paddle Selector

 

When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration without removing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration paddle selector situated on the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through four stages of deceleration.

When descending a hill, you can use the deceleration paddle selector to help maintain the rate of deceleration, thereby allowing you to keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

1Deceleration Paddle Selector

 

CAUTION
Rapidly increasing the deceleration rate by quickly shifting the deceleration paddle selector can cause the tires to skid, resulting in a crash that could injure or kill someone.

Decrease

 

Deceleration

Stage

 

The default deceleration stage is . Each paddle selector operation makes a single stage deceleration change.

u The deceleration stage may not change if you keep the paddle selector pulled back.

Always maintain a reasonable rate of deceleration.

If you are descending a hill when you select stage , the vehicle may enter stage .

Driving

Increase

To select the different stages of deceleration:

Pull back the + selector (right side) to decrease the deceleration stage.
Pull back the – selector (left side) to increase the deceleration stage.
Pull the + selector for a few seconds when you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector.

If you pull back right and left paddle selector at the same time, the deceleration stage may not change.

484

When DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector
When to use

Shift position is in (D

When SPORT mode is OFF, the deceleration stage appears.

Increase the deceleration stage when pulling the (- paddle selector (left side)

Deceleration Stage

 

When SPORT mode is ON, the deceleration stage and M appear.

Paddle Selector

Decrease the deceleration stage when pulling the (+ paddle selector (right side)

1Deceleration Paddle Selector

 

In the following situations, the stage may not change and the stage icon will blink even if you pull back the selector. The deceleration stage may decrease or cancel automatically:

The High Voltage battery is fully charged or its temperature is too cold or too hot.
The speed of the vehicle is beyond the deceleration range with SPORT mode off.
Hybrid system protection is needed.
The paddle selector is operated while your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
If either paddle selector is operated, ACC with Low Speed Follow will cancel automatically.

Driving

 

Continued 485

When DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector
Driving

 

When SPORT mode is OFF
If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change temporarily, and the stage will appear in the driver information interface.

When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, pull the + selector (right side) for a few seconds.

The deceleration paddle selector will cancel automatically and deceleration stage in the driver information interface disappear when you drive with constant speed, situations of acceleration and decelerate just before stopping your vehicle.

When SPORT mode is ON
If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change and the stage along with M will appear in the driver information interface. The deceleration stage will not cancel automatically while SPORT mode is ON.

When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, turn the SPORT mode OFF, or pull the + selector (right side) for a few seconds. When canceled, deceleration stage in the driver information interface disappears.

486

When DrivinguECON Mode
ECON Mode

 

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the climate control system and the accelerator pedal response.

1ECON Mode

 

While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuation.

 

Driving

487

When DrivinguAcoustic Vehicle Alerting System
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System

 

Alerts pedestrians when the vehicle transmission is in a position other than P and is traveling at speeds of 22 mph (36 km/h) or less.

 

Driving

488

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

VSA® Operation

VSA® System

Indicator

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine and motor do not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the 12V-battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

Continued 489

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving

 

VSA® On and Off
This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

 

Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.

VSA® OFF Indicator

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press

the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a

beep.

 

VSA® is turned on every time you turn the power system on, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after turning the power system on or while driving. This is normal.

490

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Agile Handling Assist

 

Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.

1Agile Handling Assist

 

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

 

Driving

491

When DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM

 

Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.

You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.

If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.

 

1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM

 

NOTICE

Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage.

The AWD system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 612
Driving

492

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

 

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated.

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator

indicator to come on and a message to appear

on the driver information interface.

 

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

 

The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather.
Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer
weather.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of overinflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 606
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when:

You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the steering wheel.
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
Tire chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions:

There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires, such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at calibration.
Tire chains are used.
Driving

 

Continued 493

 

Driving

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:

Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
Rotate the tires.
Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:

Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 606

Make sure:

The vehicle is at a complete stop.
Change the shift position to P.
The power mode is in ON.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

 

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the 12V-battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1TPMS Calibration

The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-65 mph (48-105 km/h).

During this period, if the ignition is turned on and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.

If the tire chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.

494

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with color audio system

 

You can calibrate the system from the

customized features on the driver information

interface.

1. Press the then / button to select

Vehicle Settings, then press the ENTER

button.

u TPMS Calibration appears on the

display.

Press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you

can select Cancel or Calibrate.

Press the 3 / 4 button and select Calibrate, then press the ENTER button. u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

If the Calibration Failed to Start message appears, repeat steps 2-3.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
Driving

 

Continued 495

 

Driving

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with Display Audio

 

You can calibrate the system from the

customized feature on the audio/information

screen.

Set the power mode to ON.
Select .

3. Select Settings.

Select Vehicle.
Select TPMS Calibration.
Select Cancel or Calibrate.
u When the calibration is complete, the display returns to the customization menu screen.

If the Unable to initialize TPMS. message appears, repeat step 6.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
496

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation

 

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

 

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Driving

 

Continued 497

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation
Driving

 

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

498

When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
Blind spot information System*

 

Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.”

When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes.

How the system works
1Blind spot information System *

 

WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes.

The transmission is in (D.
Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h)
Alert zone range

Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors:

Alert Zone

underneath the

A

rear bumper

corners

B

C

 

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, blind spot information system has limitations. Overreliance on blind spot information system may result in a collision.

The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur.

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Info Not Available driver information interface appearing.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message appearing.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 499

When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
When the system detects a vehicle

Blind spot information System Alert Indicator:

Located on the outside rearview mirror on both sides.

Comes on when:
A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind to overtake you with a speed difference of no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your vehicle.
You pass a vehicle with a speed difference of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and the beeper sounds when:
You move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds three times.

 

Comes On

Blinks

1Blind spot information System *

 

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions:

A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more than two seconds.
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
You can change the setting for the blind spot information system.

Customized Features P. 369
Driving

* Not available on all models
When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
1Blind spot information System *

Blind spot information system may be adversely affected when:

Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected.
An object that does not reflect radio waves well, such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
Driving on a curved road.
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
The system picks up external electrical interference.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
Making a turn at an intersection.
Driving on a bumpy road.
Making a short turn that slightly tilts the vehicle.

For proper blind spot information system operation:

Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models 501

When DrivinguHigh Voltage Battery
High Voltage Battery

 

The High Voltage battery gradually discharges even if the vehicle is not in use. As a result, if your vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the battery charge level will become low. Extended periods of time at a low state of charge will shorten battery life. To maintain the battery state of charge, drive your vehicle for more than 30 minutes at least once every three months.

Extreme high temperatures can affect the battery life. You can minimize the effects by parking the vehicle in the shade during the summer.

 

1High Voltage Battery

 

Be careful not to let the High Voltage battery drain too much. If the battery level becomes close to zero, it will make it impossible to start the engine.

Driving

502

Honda Sensing®

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located inside the front grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Honda Sensing® has following functions.

The functions which do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 506

• Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 543

The functions which require switch operations to activate
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow 2 P. 517
• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 534

 

Driving

Continued 503

Honda Sensing®u
Operation Switches for the ACC with Low Speed Follow/
LKAS

Driving

 

CANCEL Button

 

MAIN Button

RES/+ Button

Interval Button

LKAS Button −/SET Button

MAIN Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC with

Low Speed Follow and LKAS. Or press to

cancel these systems.

LKAS Button
Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.

RES/+ and −/SET Buttons
Press RES/+ button to resume the ACC with

Low Speed Follow or increase the vehicle

speed.

Press −/SET button to set the ACC with Low

Speed Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.

Interval Button
Press the (interval) button to change the

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow following-

interval.

CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.

504

Driver Information Interface Content
You can see the current state of ACC with

 

Low Speed Follow, and LKAS.

aIndicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow, and LKAS are ready to be activated.

bIndicates that LKAS is activated and

whether or not traffic lane lines are

detected.

cIndicates whether or not ACC with Low

Speed Follow detected the vehicle ahead.

dIndicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow

shows the set vehicle speed.

eIndicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow

shows the set vehicle interval.

Honda Sensing®u

Driving

505

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Important Safety Reminder

The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 511
For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

Radar Sensor P. 550
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 548
506

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
How the system works

When to use

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The radar sensor is

in the front grille.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle in front of you.

The CMBSTM activates when:

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with:
Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in your same direction.
A pedestrian who is detected in front of you.
Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling in your same direction.
1How the system works

 

When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.

Driving

 

Continued 507

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

When the system activates

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided.

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
Visual Alerts

Beep

Audible Alert

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system’s earliest collision alert will come on through driver information interface* or audio/information screen* setting options.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
1How the system works

 

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians.

However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions.

Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 511
* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

Distance between vehicles

CMBSTM

The sensors detect a vehicle

Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Braking

When in Long, visual and

NORMAL

Vehicle

audible alerts come on at a

Stage

LONG SHORT

Ahead

There is a risk of a collision with

longer distance from a vehicle

one

the vehicle ahead of you.

ahead than in Normal setting,

and in Short, at a shorter

Your Vehicle

distance than in Normal.

Stage

Your

Vehicle

The risk of a collision has

Vehicle

Ahead

increased, time to respond is

Lightly applied

two

reduced.

Visual and audible alerts.

Stage

Your

Vehicle

The CMBSTM determines that a

Vehicle

Ahead

Forcefully applied

three

collision is unavoidable.

 

Driving

 

Continued 509

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

CMBSTM On and Off
Press and hold the button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off.

 

When the CMBSTM is off:

The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.

A message on the driver information interface reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you turn

the power system on, even if you turned it off

the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 511
When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the 12V-battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g. the warning message appears too frequently).

510

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

Front Sensor Camera P. 548
Radar Sensor P. 550
Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between objects and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, pedestrians or other vehicles may not be detected).
Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving

 

Continued 511

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, etc.).
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The camera temperature gets too high.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

Driving

512

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Detection limitations
A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
Driving

 

Continued 513

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

 

When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
When the pedestrian is slouching or squatting.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 7 feet (2 meter) in height.
When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands or raised or they are running.
When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Automatic shutoff
CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when:

The temperature inside the system is high.
You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.).
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

514

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

 

Driving

Continued 515

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

 

Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

 

516

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

 

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.

 

When to use

The camera is

located behind

the rearview

mirror.

The radar sensor is inside the front grille.

Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.

Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

 

WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.

Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.

WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

Radar Sensor P. 550
Driving

 

Continued 517

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

How to activate the system

How to use

Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.
ACC (green) is on in the driver information interface.

ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

 

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 548
When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with Low Speed Follow and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off.

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 524
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions:

On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC with Low Speed Follow will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
518

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Set the Vehicle Speed

On when ACC with Low Speed Follow begins

−/SET button

Press and release

When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins.

When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If the vehicle is stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

 

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the 12V-battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface* or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 519

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Set Vehicle Distance

 

Set Vehicle Speed

 

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts

operating, the vehicle icon, distance bars and

set speed appear on the driver information

interface.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow,

Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric

Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to

automatically compensate for natural steering

pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for

you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Driving

520

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

To Set or Change Following-Interval P. 528

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

 

1When in Operation

 

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

Driving

 

A vehicle icon appears on the

driver information interface

Continued 521

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
There is no vehicle ahead
1When in Operation

 

vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal.

If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

Even if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:

The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
Driving

 

When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 524
522

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and
slows to a stop

Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The Stopped message appears on the driver information interface.

 

When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, the vehicle icon on the driver information interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or –/ SET button, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates again within the prior set speed.

If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume driving, depressing the accelerator pedal will resume operation of ACC with Low Speed Follow within the prior set speed.

 

1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop

 

WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.

A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

 

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Driving

Continued 523

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

Front Sensor Camera P. 548
Radar Sensor P. 550
Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Vehicle conditions
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, etc.).
The camera temperature gets too high.
The parking brake is applied.
When the front grille is dirty.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

 

The radar sensor for ACC with Low Speed Follow is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 506
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock, embankment, etc.
You drive the vehicle where water is deep.
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
524

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Detection limitations
A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.

Driving

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
Continued 525

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
When driving through a narrow metal bridge.

Driving

 

When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
Sensor detects upper section of

Panel truck,

an empty carrier truck.

tanker truck,

etc.

 

When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
526

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET button on the steering wheel.

 

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

 

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface* or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then push and release the –/SET button, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 527

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Set or Change Following-Interval
Driving

 

Interval Button

 

Press the (Interval) button to change the

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow following-

interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through extra

long, long, middle, and short following-

interval.

Determine the most appropriate following-

interval setting based on your specific driving

conditions. Be sure to adhere to any

following-interval requirements set by local

regulation.

528

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

 

Following-Interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

81.0 feet

103.3 feet

Short

24.7 meters

31.5 meters

1.1 sec

1.1 sec

112.2 feet

142.4 feet

Middle

34.2 meters

43.4 meters

1.5 sec

1.5 sec

153.5 feet

199.4 feet

Long

46.8 meters

60.8 meters

2.1 sec

2.1 sec

Extra

208.3 feet

273.6 feet

63.5 meters

83.4 meters

Long

2.9 sec

2.9 sec

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow interval setting.

Driving

 

Continued 529

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Cancel
CANCEL

To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any

of the following:

Button

Press the CANCEL button.

Press the MAIN button.

u ACC with Low Speed Follow indicator

goes off.

• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is

MAIN

moving forward.

Button

 

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button.

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

Driving

530

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:

Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA®, or CMBSTM is activated.
When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too close to your vehicle.
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.

The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
The power system is turned off.
1Automatic cancellation

 

Even though ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves, then press the –/SET button.

Driving

 

Continued 531

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

 

ACC with

Cruise

Low Speed

Follow ON

Control ON

 

When to use
Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

 

To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the button again for one second.

 

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface* or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
Driving

 

Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button.
Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically.

Driving

 

533

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Tactile and visual alerts

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Important Safety Reminders

 

The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or

Driving

 

Front sensor camera
Monitors the lane lines

Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

fail to steer the vehicle.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the front windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 540
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off.

If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 548
534

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane, when the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

 

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

 

Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

 

Warning Area

Warning Area

Driving

Continued 535

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.

The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

How to activate the system

MAIN Button

LKAS Button

Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information interface.

The system is ready to use.

Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver information interface.

The system is activated.

536

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

 

To cancel
MAIN Button

LKAS Button

To cancel the LKAS:

Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you turn the

power system off, even if you turned it on the

last time you drove the vehicle.

 

1To cancel

 

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with Low Speed Follow on and off.

Driving

 

Continued 537

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

 

The system operation is suspended if
you:

Set the wipers to HI.
u Turning the wipers off or setting it to LO resumes the LKAS.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

 

Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate at high speed.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop or operate at low speed.

All models

 

Decrease the vehicle speed to 40 mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.

Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.

1The system operation is suspended if you:

 

You can change the setting for the LKAS.

LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
538

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.

• The steering wheel is quickly turned.

• You fail to steer the vehicle.

• Driving through a sharp curve.

• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).

Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

The LKAS may be automatically canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty.

• The ABS or VSA® systems engage.

 

The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

Driving

Continued 539

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markings.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
540

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving

 

Continued 541

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
Driving on roads with double lines.

Lane void of lines at exit or

interchange

Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
542

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.

 

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the driver information interface.

If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking.

u Braking is applied only when the lane

markings are solid continuous lines.

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid

crossing over detected lane markings.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations.

Overreliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 548
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 546
There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

Driving

 

Continued 543

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
How the System Activates
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

The system activates when all the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking, or steering.

Driving

If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, the message below will appear in case the system determines a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings.

Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 109

Customized Features P. 140, 369
1How the System Activates

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on.

Indicators P. 90
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:

Not driven within a traffic lane.
Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane.
Driven in a narrow lane.
* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
RDM On and Off
Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off.

 

u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the driver information interface when the system is on.

Indicator RDM Button

1RDM On and Off

 

When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.

Customized Features P. 140, 369
The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the 12V-battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

 

Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 545

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving

 

RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
546

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
Driving

 

547

Honda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
Front Sensor Camera

 

The camera, used in systems; such as RDM, LKAS, ACC with Low Speed Follow and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.

Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera

 

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

Driving

 

Front Sensor

 

Camera

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing.

Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

548

Honda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
1Front Sensor Camera

 

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument

panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent

the system from detecting lane lines properly.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate:Camera Temperature Too High:

message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the air flow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate:Clean Front Windshield: message

appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving

 

549

 

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uRadar Sensor

Radar Sensor

 

The radar sensor is in the front grille.

1Radar Sensor

Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.

For the CMBSTM to work properly:

• Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.

• Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder

for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water

Radar Sensor

or a mild detergent.

 

• Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or

replace the radar sensor cover.

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or

removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly

impacted, turn off the system by using the CMBSTM

OFF button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 510

If the vehicle is involved in any of the following

situations, the radar sensor may not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

• Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision.

• Your vehicle drives through deep water or is

submerged in deep water.

• Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,

or embankment that could jar the radar sensor.

550

Braking

Brake System

Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

1Braking

 

When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is because the brake system is in operation, and it is

Electric Parking

 

Brake Switch

 

Electric Parking

Brake Switch

To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the power mode is in.

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely.

u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) comes on.

To release
The power mode must be in ON in order to release the electric parking brake.

Depress the brake pedal.
Press the electric parking brake switch. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.

Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle to start slowly and smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.

normal.

1Parking Brake

You may hear the electric parking brake system motor operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the 12V-battery goes dead.

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 647
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the electric servo brake system until the vehicle come to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.

Driving

 

Continued 551

BrakinguBrake System
■ Automatic parking brake feature operation

1Parking Brake

 

If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:

The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to OFF.
To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) is on.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 553

To release automatically
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.

Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates.

• When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes

while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while

your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with

Low Speed Follow.

• When the power system is turned off while ACC

with Low Speed Follow is activated.

• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake

hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while

Driving

 

Accelerator Pedal

Gently depress the accelerator pedal. When on a hill, it may require more accelerator input to release.

u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.

• When the power system is turned off while brake

hold is applied.

• When there is a problem with the Brake Hold

System while brake hold is applied.

If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.

When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to

You can release the parking brake automatically when:

You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
The power system is on.
The transmission is not in P or N.
automatically release the electric parking brake.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Malfunction indicator lamp
Transmission system indicator
552

BrakinguBrake System
Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature With the power mode is ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.
1. Put the transmission into P.

2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up the electric parking brake switch. u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.

3. Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound, release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.

4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the switch.

u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated. u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.

u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will remain applied after you turn off the power system.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) is on.

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash. You can follow the procedure explained below.

Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the electric parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected. u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both

ACC with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) is on.

1Parking Brake

 

The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Parking brake and brake system indicator (amber)
VSA® system indicator
ABS indicator
Supplemental restraint system indicator
In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied.

When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the automatic parking brake feature is deactivated.

Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-type car wash or when having your vehicle towed, deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and leave the parking brake released.

Driving

 

Continued 553

BrakinguBrake System
Driving

 

Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Brake Assist System P. 558
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 557
1Foot Brake

 

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Applying constant pressure to the brakes while going down a long hill can cause the brakes to heat up, resulting in a loss of stopping power. Therefore, when descending a long hill, release the accelerator pedal and allow regenerative braking to slow the vehicle down. To adjust the rate of deceleration, use the deceleration paddle selector.

When the high voltage battery has fully recharged, regenerative braking may not be possible.

POWER/CHARGE Gauge P. 126
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge P. 127
Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 484
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

554

BrakinguBrake System
Automatic Brake Hold
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

■ Turning on the system ■ Activating the system ■ Canceling the system

 

Comes

On

On

On

Comes

Goes

On

Off

Automatic Brake

Brake Pedal

Accelerator Pedal

Hold Button

1Automatic Brake Hold

 

WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal.

If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.

Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the power system. Press the automatic brake hold button.

The automatic brake hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.
Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The transmission must not be in (P or (R.

The automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.
Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.
Depress the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in a position other than (P or (N. The system is cancelled and the vehicle starts to move.

The automatic brake hold indicator goes off. The system continues to be on.
WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.

If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.

Driving

 

Continued 555

BrakinguBrake System
The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.

• You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into P or R.

The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• The power system is turned off.

• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

Turning off the automatic brake hold system
1Automatic Brake Hold

 

While the system is activated, you can turn off the power system or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do.

When Stopped P. 559
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the power system is off.

1Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Driving

 

Automatic Brake

 

Hold Button

Goes

Off

While the system is on, press the automatic brake hold button again.

u The automatic brake hold system indicator goes off.

If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.

You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.

556

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.“

ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:

Wet or snow covered roads.
Roads paved with stone.
Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

 

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the incorrect size or type.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:

You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:

Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.
Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

Driving

 

557

BrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System

 

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

 

Driving

558

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped

 

Depress the brake pedal firmly.
With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly, but fully.
Change the shift position to P.
Turn off the power system.
The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 15 seconds.
Always set the parking brake, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle

 

WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

 

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

Driving

Continued 559

Parking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped

Driving

1When Stopped

 

NOTICE

The following can damage the driveline:

Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.
Changing to (P before the vehicle stops completely.
When facing uphill, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

Doing so may cause the power system to overheat

and fail.

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake

may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are

expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if

parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so

they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the

slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from

moving. If you do not take either precaution, the

vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

560

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Parking Sensor System*

 

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

■ The sensor location and range

 

Front Corner Sensors

Front Center Sensors

Rear Corner Sensors

Rear Center Sensors

Front: Within about 24 in (60 cm) Front: Within about 39 in (100 cm)

or less or less

Rear: Within about 28 in (70 cm) Rear: Within about 43 in (110 cm)

or less or less

1Parking Sensor System*

 

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when:

The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or dirt.
The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass, bumps, or a hill.
The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
The system is affected by devices that emit ultrasonic waves.
Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:

Thin or low objects.
Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton, or sponge.
Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 561

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on.

 

The front corner and front center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in any position other than P or R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner, rear corner and rear center

sensors start to detect an obstacle when the

transmission is in R, and the vehicle speed is

less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

 

1Parking sensor system on and off

 

When you set the power mode to ON, the system will be in the previously selected condition.

Driving

562

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Screen Operation
Normal display

Tab

You can switch the display to normal display

or split display by touching the tab vicinity or

on the camera display.

Touch

Touch

Camera

display

Split display

1 Screen Operation

 

If the parking sensor system is off or there is a malfunction in the system, the tab disappears, and the split display returns to the normal display.

You can also switch the display to normal display or split display using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 369
Touch

Touch

Driving

Continued 563

 

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Driving

 

When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter

Interval between

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle

Indicator

Driver Information Interface/

beeps

Corner Sensors

Center Sensors

Audio/Information Screen

Front: About 41-26 in

Audio/information screen

Moderate

(105-65 cm)

Blinks in Yellow*1

Rear: About 45-26 in

Front: About 26-19 in

(115-65 cm)

(65-50 cm)

Short

About 26-19 in (65-50 cm)

Indicators light

up where the

Rear: About 30-19 in

sensor detects an obstacle

(75-50 cm)

Blinks in Amber

Very short

About 19-16 in (50-40 cm)

About 19-16 in (50-40 cm)

Driver information interface

Continuous

About 16 in (40 cm) or less

About 16 in (40 cm) or less

Blinks in Red

Indicators light up where the

sensor detects an obstacle

*1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

564

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Turning off All Rear Sensors
Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator in the button flashes.
Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.

1Turning off All Rear Sensors

 

When you shift to (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.

 

Driving

565

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.

The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

 

Driving

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.

* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

How the System Works
The system activates when:

 

The power mode is in ON.
The Cross Traffic Monitor system is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 569

The transmission is in R.
Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.

Radar sensors:

Underneath the rear bumper

corners

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.

The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.

The system does not detect or provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions:

An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall, near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the radar sensor’s scope.
Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher.
A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25 km/h).
The system picks up external interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt.
When there is bad weather.
Your vehicle is on an incline.
Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a vehicle, and so on.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.

Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 567

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

1When the System Detects a Vehicle

When the System Detects a Vehicle

If the

on the lower right changes to

when the

Arrow Icon

transmission is in (R, mud snow or ice may have

accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. Check the

bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly

clean the area if necessary.

If the

comes on when the transmission is in (R,

there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic

Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your

Normal View

Wide View

Top Down View

vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the display remains the same with the transmission

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information

in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera

screen.

system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.

Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

 

Driving

568

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Camera.
Select Cross Traffic Monitor.
Select On or Off, then select OK.

Icon

 

The system can also be turned on and off on

the audio/information screen by pressing the

CTM icon.

 

Driving

569

 

Driving

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The display automatically changes to a rear view when the transmission is put into R.

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see

the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath

the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing

Wide View Mode

up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and

Approx.

high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do

39 inches

not rely on the rearview display which does not give

you all information about conditions at the back of

(1 m)

Approx.

your vehicle.

20 inches

Normal View Mode

(50 cm)

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,

Tailgate

Bumper

use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free

Open

Guidelines

of debris.

Range

Camera

Models with Display Audio

Top Down View Mode

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic

Guideline settings.

2 Customized Features P. 369

Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you put the

transmission into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel

direction.

Off: Guidelines do not move.

 

570

Multi-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.

Models with color audio system

 

Press the selector knob to switch the angle.

Models with Display Audio

 

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.

: Wide view mode

: Normal view mode

: Top down view mode

 

All models

 

If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the power system, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

Models with color audio system

You can change the Camera Guideline On or Off settings.

Customized Features P. 362
Camera Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Driving

 

571

Refueling

Driving

 

Fuel Information

Fuel recommendation

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 14 US gal (53 L)
1Fuel Information

 

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

572

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
How to Refuel

 

Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.

1.

Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

rear.

2.

Turn off the power system.

3.

Pull on the fuel fill door release handle

Pull

under the lower left corner of the

 

dashboard.

u The fuel fill door opens.

1How to Refuel

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

Driving

 

Continued 573

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving

 

Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level.

u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically.

u After filling, wait about five seconds

before removing the filler nozzle. u If you do not fill up the tank to full,

always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5.0 L) of fuel.

Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

 

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 665
574

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface.

Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 588

Maintain the specified tire pressure.
Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance.
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

Miles driven

Gallons of

Miles per

fuel

Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

Driving

 

575

This page intentionally left blank.

576

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Cooling System…………………………..

593

Tire and Wheel Replacement ………..

612

Inspection and Maintenance …………

578

Transmission Fluid……………………….

595

Tire Rotation………………………………

613

Safety When Performing Maintenance ..

579

Brake Fluid…………………………………

596

Winter Tires ……………………………….

614

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Refilling Window Washer Fluid………

597

12-volt Battery…………………………….

615

Service …………………………………….

580

Replacing Light Bulbs …………………..

598

Remote Transmitter Care

Maintenance MinderTM …………………

581

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades ..

601

Replacing the Remote Battery ……….

617

Maintenance Under the Hood

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Climate Control System Maintenance ..

618

Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 586

Checking Tires ……………………………

606

Cleaning

Opening the Hood ………………………

587

Tire and Loading Information Label ……

607

Interior Care ………………………………

619

Recommended Engine Oil …………….

588

Tire Labeling ………………………………

607

Exterior Care………………………………

621

Oil Check …………………………………..

589

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)..

609

Accessories and Modifications……….

624

Adding Engine Oil……………………….

590

Wear Indicators…………………………..

611

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter …

591

Tire Service Life …………………………..

611

577

Before Performing Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Inspection and Maintenance

 

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Routine inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

2 Maintenance P. 36

Periodic inspections
Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 596

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 606

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 598
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 601
1Inspection and Maintenance

 

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 584
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

Authorized Manuals P. 678
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

578

Before Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the 12-volt battery, all High Voltage system, and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt battery or compressed air.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
1Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

 

Continued 579

Before Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance

 

Vehicle Safety
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the power system is turned off.

Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the power system including the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.

Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not activate the power system unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts. When the power system is on, the engine can automatically start, or the radiator fan may start operating without the engine running.

Do not touch the high-voltage battery and wiring (orange).
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

580

Maintenance MinderTM

Select the Maintenance Minder to see maintenance items that are due soon and to see the percentage of life remaining in the engine oil.

When the engine oil life is less than 15%, a Maintenance Minder message will appear every time you set the power mode to ON, reminding you to bring your vehicle to a dealer for service.

 

Maintenance

581

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

 

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.

You can view them on the Maintenance Minder screen at any time.

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the button several times until is displayed.
Press ENTER to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Engine Oil Life

Button

Main Item

Sub Item

ENTER Button

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

 

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

Life (%)

100

100 to 91

90

90 to 81

80

80 to 71

70

70 to 61

60

60 to 51

50

50 to 41

40

40 to 31

30

30 to 21

20

20 to 16

15

15 to 11

10

10 to 6

5

5 to 1

0

0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 584
582

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

When you select the Maintenance

Minder screen, it displays codes for

maintenance items due at the next

engine oil change, along with the

percentage of engine oil life

remaining.

Maintenance Due Soon

The engine oil life indicator starts to

The engine oil is approaching the end

appear along with other due-soon

of its service life.

maintenance item codes when the

remaining oil life drops to 15 percent.

Maintenance Due Now

The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1

The engine oil has almost reached the

percent. Press the

button to

end of its service life, and the

switch to another display.

maintenance items should be

inspected and serviced as soon as

possible.

Maintenance Past Due

The engine oil has passed its service

The engine oil life has passed.

life, and a negative distance appears

The maintenance items must be

after driving over 10 miles. The

inspected and serviced immediately.

negative distance on the display

blinks.

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance

 

Continued 583

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Service Items
System Message

Maintenance Minder Message

Indicator

Main Item

Sub Items

 

1Maintenance Service Items

 

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Maintenance

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check expiration date for tire repair kit bottle
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2 ● Replace dust and pollen filter*3
● Replace transmission fluid*4

● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect valve clearance

● Replace engine coolant

● Replace rear differential fluid
● Replace brake fluid*5

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 47,500 miles (75,000 km) or 3 years.

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

584

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

 

ENTER Button

(Display/Information) Button

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the (display/information) button repeatedly until the appears.
Press the ENTER button.
Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
Press 3 / 4 to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item.
Repeat from step 4 for other items you wish to reset.
1Resetting the Display

 

NOTICE

Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

Models with Display Audio

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.

How to customize P. 369
Maintenance

 

585

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

 

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reserve Tank

 

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange)

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

12-volt Battery

Maintenance

Radiator Cap

586

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood

 

Hood Release Handle

 

Pull

Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
Pull the hood release handle under the driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
1Opening the Hood

 

WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.

To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the rod: Use the foam grip instead.

Lever

 

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Maintenance

 

587

Maintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance

 

Recommended Engine Oil

 

Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.

Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

 

Genuine Engine Oil

Commercial Engine Oil

Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

• Honda Genuine Motor Oil

with an API Certification Seal on the

container

0W-20

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.

Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

1Recommended Engine Oil

 

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements.

588

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check

 

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Turn off the power system. You can check the oil level without the engine having run beforehand. If the engine has been running, wait approximately three minutes before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange).
Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and

lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

1Oil Check

 

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

Maintenance

 

589

Maintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil

 

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Add oil slowly.

3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.

Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick.
Engine Oil

Fill Cap

 

1Adding Engine Oil

 

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

Maintenance

590

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Turning the power system on automatically starts the engine if the High Voltage battery charge level gauge shows two segments or less.

High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge P. 127
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Remove the Phillips-head screws and

slotted head screws by turning 90° counter-clockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.

Screw Under Cover

Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.

Drain Bolt

Washer

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Maintenance

 

Continued 591

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance

 

Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.

6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to

Oil Filter

the engine contact surface.

u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter gasket.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.0 US qt (3.8 L)

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

Reinstall the under cover in the same order it was removed.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

Be sure to verify that the oil filter is designed for your vehicle. A genuine Honda oil filter is recommended for optimum lubrication flow and filtration properties to assure the reliability of the engine.

592

uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System

Cooling System

 

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

Reserve Tank
Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN

mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

MAX 3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Reserve

MIN

Tank

1Cooling System

 

WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

Maintenance

 

Continued 593

Maintenance Under the HooduCooling System
Radiator

Radiator Cap

 

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter-clockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
1Radiator

 

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

Maintenance

594

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid

 

Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the transmission fluid yourself.

1Transmission Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

 

Maintenance

595

Maintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Brake Fluid

 

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN

Reserve

Tank

and MAX marks on the side of the reserve

 

tank.

MAX

MIN

 

Maintenance

1Brake Fluid

 

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

596

Maintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

 

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid.

Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale buildup.

 

Maintenance

597

Replacing Light Bulbs

Maintenance

 

Headlights

 

Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Fog Lights*

 

Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

 

Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Turn Signal/Front Side Marker Lights

 

Front turn signal lights/front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

 

Door mirror side turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Brake/Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights and Rear Side Marker Lights

 

Brake/taillights, rear turn signal lights and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

1Headlights

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

 

* Not available on all models
Replacing Light BulbsuTaillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Taillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1Taillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs

 

Taillight: LED

Back-Up Light: 16W

 

Cover

Remove the cover by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda

dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

2.

Turn the socket counter-clockwise and

Bulb

remove it. Remove the old bulb.

3.

Insert a new bulb.

 

Socket

Maintenance

 

599

Replacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light
Rear License Plate Light

 

Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light

 

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

 

Maintenance

600

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

 

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
While holding the wiper switch in the MIST position, set the power mode to ON, then to VEHICLE OFF.
u Both wiper arms are set to the maintenance position as shown in the image.

Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side.

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

 

Maintenance

Continued 601

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance

 

Tab

 

Wiper

Blade

End Cap At

The Bottom

 

Wiper Blade

Holder

Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm.
Pull the end of the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow in the image until it is out of the holder’s end cap.
Pull the wiper blade in the opposite direction to slide it out of the holder.
602

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Wiper Blade

 

Holder

Cap

Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the indent of the wiper blade.

Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then push down the lock tab.
Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side.
Set the power mode to ON and hold the wiper switch in the MIST position until both wiper arms return to the standard position.

Maintenance

603

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

 

1.

Raise the wiper arm off.

Wiper Arm

2.

Pivot the bottom end of the holder up until

it comes off from the wiper arm.

 

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm, it may damage the rear window.

Maintenance

 

Slide the blade out of the holder.

Wiper Blade

4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and

Retainer

mount to a new rubber blade.

 

604

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.

Holder

u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then

install the wiper blade assembly onto the

wiper arm.

 

Maintenance

605

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Maintenance

 

Checking Tires

 

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1–2 psi (10–20 kPa, 0.1–0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
Excessive tread wear.
Wear Indicators P. 611
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires

 

WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 493
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

606

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

 

Label

Example

Tire Labeling

 

1Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains:

a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Example Tire Size

 

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown.

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

P235/60 R18 102T

P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

235: Tire width in millimeters.

60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

18: Rim diameter in inches.

102: Load index (a numerical code associated with

the maximum load the tire can carry).

T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the

Maintenance

 

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

maximum speed rating).

Continued 607

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

22 09: Date of manufacture.

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Year

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Week

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

 

Maintenance

608

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

 

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

 

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Maintenance

 

Continued 609

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance

 

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

1Traction

 

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

610

Wear Indicators

 

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Example of a Wear

 

Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)

shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the

tread has worn so that the indicator is

exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

 

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Maintenance

 

611

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire‘s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

 

Maintenance

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual.

612

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information

1Tire Rotation

interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be

■ Tires without rotation marks

rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).

Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation

indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

Front

Direction Mark

 

Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the

TPMS.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

P. 493

Front

Maintenance

 

613

Checking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance

 

Winter Tires

 

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:

Install them on the front tires only.
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below:
Models with 235/65R17 tires

 

Models with 235/55R19 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2111MM

Models with 235/60R18 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2212MM

Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
Drive slowly.
1Winter Tires

 

WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

614

12-volt Battery

Checking the 12-volt Battery

 

The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:

The audio system is disabled.
Audio System Theft Protection P. 247
The clock resets*.
Clock P. 150
112-volt Battery

 

WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

 

Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 615

12-volt BatteryuCharging the 12-volt Battery
Maintenance

 

Charging the 12-volt Battery

 

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

112-volt Battery

 

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications.

Consult a dealer for more information.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), Low Tire Pressure/TPMS, and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

616

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery

 

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

 

Battery type: CR2032

Remove the built-in key.
Remove the upper half of the cover by

carefully prying on the edge with a coin.

Battery

u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

scratching the keyless remote.

u Remove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons.

3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

1Replacing the Remote Battery

 

WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD

The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children.

If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

Maintenance

 

617

Climate Control System Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Air Conditioning

 

To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Dust and Pollen Filter

 

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Climate Control System Maintenance

 

NOTICE

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood:

Safety Labels P. 87
Specifications P. 668
1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

618

Cleaning

Interior Care

 

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

 

Loop

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

1Interior Care

 

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models Continued 619

CleaninguInterior Care
Floor Mats

Unlock

Lock

The driver’s floor mat hooks over floor anchors, which keep them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

1Floor Mats

 

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

Maintenance

 

Maintaining Genuine Leather*
To properly clean leather:

Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% water and 10% neutral soap.
Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

* Not available on all models
uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care

 

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.

Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions:

If driving on roads with road salt.
If driving in coastal areas.
If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Using an Automated Car Wash
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Fold in the door mirrors.
For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
Using High Pressure Cleaners
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior.
Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
1Washing the Vehicle

 

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.

If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the maintenance position.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber P. 601
1Using an Automated Car Wash

When using an automated car wash that pulls the vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure the transmission in (N position.

If you want to keep the transmission in (N position P. 481
Maintenance

 

Continued 621

CleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance

 

Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

1Applying Wax

 

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

622

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Maintenance

623

Accessories and Modifications

Maintenance

 

Accessories

 

When installing accessories, check the following:

Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions.
Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 659

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications

 

WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications.

WARNING
Use of improperly designed, engineered or manufactured high-voltage battery assemblies could cause a fire in your vehicle.

A vehicle fire could result in a crash or injury.

Only use a genuine Honda high-voltage battery assembly, or its equivalent, in your vehicle.

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

624

Modifications

 

Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair your vehicle’s high-voltage hybrid power system or otherwise modify vehicle electrical systems. Disassembling or modifying electrical equipment can result in a crash or a fire.

If you ever need to replace your vehicle’s high-voltage battery assembly outside of warranty coverage, we highly recommend that you only use a genuine Honda high-voltage battery assembly. Genuine Honda high-voltage battery assemblies are designed to work with your vehicle’s hybrid power system and have been designed, engineered and manufactured to avoid overcharging situations. Non-genuine high-voltage battery assemblies may not have been similarly designed, engineered and manufactured, and installation of such assemblies could result in overcharging, fires, loss of power, or other conditions that may increase the likelihood of a crash or injury.

Accessories and ModificationsuModifications

Maintenance

625

This page intentionally left blank.

626

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools 628

If a Tire Goes Flat

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire 629

Handling of the Jack 643

Power System Won’t Start

Checking the Procedure 644

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak 645

Emergency Power System Off 646

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead 647

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating 649

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes

On 652

If the 12-volt Battery Charging System

Indicator Comes On 652

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks 653

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On or Blinks 654

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On.. 655

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On 656

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks 657

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks

along with the Warning Message 658

Fuses

Fuse Locations 659

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 662

Emergency Towing 663

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate 664

Refueling 665

627

Tools

Types of Tools

Handling the Unexpected

 

1Types of Tools

 

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Funnel

628

If a Tire Goes Flat

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

 

If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair.

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place.

Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
Put the transmission into P.
Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

 

The kit should not be used in the following situations. Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to have the vehicle towed.

The tire sealant has expired.
More than one tire is punctured.
The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is outside the contact area.
When the puncture is:

Kit Use

Handling

Smaller than 3/16 inch

Yes

(4.8 mm)

Contact

the

Area

Larger than 3/16 inch

No

(4.8 mm)

Unexpected

• Damage has been caused by driving with the tire

extremely under inflated.

• The tire bead is no longer seated.

• The rim is damaged.

 

Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be able to repair the puncture using the kit.

Continued 629

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire

1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire

 

Repair notification label and speed restriction label are applied to the side of the temporary tire repair kit.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Sealant/Air Hose

AIR Side

Selector Knob

REPAIR Side

Pressure Gauge Pressure Relief Button Repair Notification Label

Power Plug

Instruction Manual

Tire Sealant

Expiration Date

Inflator Switch

Speed Restriction Label

When making a temporary repair, carefully read the instruction manual provided with the kit.

630

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Tab

 

Plastic Spacer

 

Tire Repair Kit

Using the tab, fold back the cargo area floor lid.
Remove the plastic spacer from the cargo area.
Unfasten the strap and remove the tire repair kit.
Place the kit face up, on flat ground near the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not place the kit on its side.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 631

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Injecting Sealant and Air

Valve Cap

Tire Valve Stem

 

Sealant/

Air Hose

 

Sealant/Air Hose

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Unwind the sealant/air hose from the kit.
Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire valve stem. Screw it clockwise until it is tight.
1Injecting Sealant and Air

 

CAUTION
Tire sealant contains substances that are harmful if inhaled, ingested or if contact is made with the eyes or skin.

Always use in a well-ventilated area and use gloves and safety glasses for protection; do not ingest.

For skin or eye contact, flush with cool water; if ingested, rinse mouth with water. In all cases, seek medical attention if necessary.

In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily. In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before using.

The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away any spills immediately.

Tire Valve Stem

632

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Plug in the compressor to the accessory power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a

 

door or window.

2 Accessory Power Socket P. 229

Turn on the vehicle’s power system.
2 Turning on the Power P. 469

u Keep the power system on while injecting sealant and air.

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 86

Turn the selector knob to REPAIR.

REPAIR Side

1Injecting Sealant and Air

 

WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

NOTICE

Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.

Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than actual. After the sealant injection is complete the pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air compressor off only after the sealant injection is complete.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 633

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Pressure Gauge

 

ON

OFF

 

Sealant/Air Hose

Tire Valve Stem

Pressure Relief

Button

 

Repair Notification Label

Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. u The compressor starts injecting sealant
and air into the tire.

u When the sealant injection is complete, continue to add air.

After the tire reaches the specified air pressure, turn off the kit.
u To check the pressure, periodically turn off the compressor and read the gauge. u Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label for

the specified pressure.

Unplug the power plug from the accessory power socket.
Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
Apply the repair notification label to the flat surface of the wheel.
u The wheel surface must be clean to ensure the label adheres properly.

1Injecting Sealant and Air

 

If the required air pressure is not reached within 10 minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle will need to be towed.

See a dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and proper disposal of an empty bottle.

634

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
Speed Restriction Label

 

Sealant/Air Hose

Apply the speed restriction label to the location as shown.
Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes. u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Recheck the air pressure using the sealant/ air hose on the compressor.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 635

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Turn the selector knob to AIR.
u Do not turn the air compressor on while checking the pressure.

2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 640

 

AIR Side

1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire

 

WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

636

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

If the air pressure is
Less than 25 psi (175 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and have your vehicle towed.

Emergency Towing P. 663
Models with 235/65R17 104H tires

 

Front: 32 psi (220 kPa)/rear: 30 psi (210 kPa) or more:
Models with 235/60R18 103H tires

 

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa) or more:
Models with 235/55R19 101H tires

 

33 psi (230 kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.

u If the air pressure does not go down after the 10 minute driving, you do not need to check the pressure any more.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 637

Handling the Unexpected

 

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Models with 235/65R17 104H tires

 

Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less than front: 32 psi (220 kPa)/rear: 30 psi (210 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front:

32 psi (220 kPa)/rear: 30 psi (210 kPa).

Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 640
Models with 235/60R18 103H tires

 

Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front:

35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa).

Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 640
Models with 235/55R19 101H tires

 

Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less than 33 psi (230 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches 33 psi (230 kPa).

Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 640
All models

 

Then, drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.

u You should repeat this procedure as long as the air pressure is not within the range indicated for the tire size.

638

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Unplug the kit from the accessory power

socket.

8. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire

valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.

9. Press the pressure relief button until the

gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).

10. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

Pressure Relief Button

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 639

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.

1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

 

NOTICE

Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit

Handling the Unexpected

Sealant/Air

 

Hose

 

Open the trunk floor lid.
Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire P. 630
Remove the kit from the case.
Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near the tire to be inflated, away from traffic. Do not place the kit on its side.
Remove the sealant/air hose from the kit.
Remove the valve cap.
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.

Valve Cap

6. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire

Sealant/Air Hose

valve stem. Screw it clockwise until it is

tight.

 

Tire Valve Stem

640

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

AIR Side

 

ON

Plug in the kit to the accessory power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or window.

2 Accessory Power Socket P. 229

Turn on the vehicle’s power system.
2 Turning on the Power P. 469

u Keep the power system on while injecting sealant and air.

Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 86
Turn the selector knob to AIR.
Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. u The compressor starts to inject air into
the tire.

Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

 

WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 641

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Turn off the kit.

u Check the pressure gauge on the air

compressor.

u If overinflated, press the pressure relief

button.

13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power

socket.

Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
Pressure Relief Button valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.

Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
Repackage and properly stow the kit.
642

Handling of the Jack

Your vehicle has jacking points as shown.

When replacing your tires, consult a dealer.

 

Jacking Points

Handling the Unexpected

 

643

Power System Won’t Start

Checking the Procedure

 

When the READY indicator does not come on and the Ready To Drive message does not appear on the driver information interface, check the following items and take appropriate action.

1Checking the Procedure

 

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 647
Handling the Unexpected

 

Checklist

Condition

What to Do

Check if the related

The Temperature Is Too Cold For Vehicle To Operate

2

Driver Information Interface Warning and

indicator or driver

message appears.

Information Messages P. 109

information interface

The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message

messages come on.

appears.

2

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operating range.

P. 645

2 POWER Button Operating Range P. 186

The POWER SYSTEM indicator comes on.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

The transmission system indicator blinks and Transmission

2

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks

Problem. Apply Parking Brake When Parked message

along with the Warning Message P. 658

appears.

Check the brightness

The interior lights are dim or do not come on at all.

Have the 12-volt battery checked by a dealer.

of the interior lights.

The interior lights come on normally.

Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by

a dealer.

2

Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 662

Check the shift

The transmission is not in (P.

Put the transmission into (P.

position.

Check the

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the power

immobilizer system

system cannot be turned on.

2

Immobilizer System Indicator P. 101

indicator.

644

uuPower System Won’t StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

 

If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface, the POWER button flashes, and the READY indicator does not come on, turn on the power system as follows:

Touch the center of the POWER button

with the H logo on the keyless remote while

the POWER button is flashing. The buttons

on the keyless remote should be facing you.

u The POWER button flashes for about 30

seconds.

Depress the brake pedal and press the

POWER button within 10 seconds after the

beeper sounds and the POWER button

changes from flashing to on.

u The READY indicator comes on.

u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

Handling the Unexpected

 

645

Power System Won’t StartuEmergency Power System Off
Handling the Unexpected

 

Emergency Power System Off

 

The POWER button may be used to turn the power system off due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must turn the power system off, do either of the following operations:

Press and hold the POWER button for about two seconds.
Firmly press the POWER button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the power system disables the power assist the power system provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place.

The transmission automatically changes to P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

1Emergency Power System Off

 

Do not press the POWER button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the power system to be turned off.

If you press the POWER button while driving, the beeper sounds.

646

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure

 

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the power system, then open the hood.

Open the terminal cover on your vehicle’s 12-volt battery positive + terminal.

Terminal
Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle’s 12-volt battery + terminal.

3. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.

u When using an automotive battery charger

to boost your 12-volt battery, select a

Booster Battery

lower charging voltage than 15-volt. Check

the charger manual for the proper setting.

Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery – terminal.
1Jump Starting Procedure

 

WARNING
A 12-volt battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the 12-volt battery.

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

12-volt battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 647

If the 12-Volt Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure
Handling the Unexpected

 

Connect the other end of the second

jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.

6. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly.

Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.

Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery – terminal.
Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s 12-volt battery + terminal.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal.
1Jump Starting Procedure

 

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), low tire pressure/TPMS, and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/ h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

648

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

 

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

The High Temperature. Power Reduced. message appears on the driver information interface.
The Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on the driver information interface.
Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
The High Temperature. Power Reduced. Message Appears on the Driver Information Interface
The High Temperature. Power Reduced. message appears on the driver information interface when the power system temperature is high.

2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 109

Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
u Set the parking brake, and put the transmission into P. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.

Keep the power mode in ON, and wait until the message disappears.
u If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 649

OverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Handling the Unexpected

 

The Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot Message Appears on the Driver Information Interface
First thing to do
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the power system on and open the hood.

u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the power system and wait until it subsides. Then, open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When

Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

650

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

Next thing to do

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

Last thing to do
Check that the cooling fan is operating and turn the power system off once the Stop
Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on the driver information interface disappears. u If the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately turn the power system off.

Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the engine coolant reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

u If there is no coolant in the engine coolant reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, turn the power system on.

If the Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message does not appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.

651

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle
Turn the power system off and let the engine sit for approximately three minutes.
Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.

Oil Check P. 589
Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Immediately turn the power system off and contact a dealer for repairs.

If the 12-volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

 

Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

 

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the 12-volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the power system. The power system uses the 12-volt battery to activate. You may not be able to turn the power system on again if you have turned it off with this indicator on.

This indicator may come on when the outside temperature is below -40°F (-40°C). It will go off after the battery warms up.

652

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

 

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system.

Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

Handling the Unexpected

 

653

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on

• The brake fluid is low.

There is a malfunction in the brake system.
What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, use the deceleration paddle selector to slow the vehicle using regenerative braking.
Reasons for the indicator to blink
There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

 

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary use the deceleration paddle selector to slower your vehicle’s speed.

If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 655
654

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the

same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, release the parking brake manually or automatically

2 Parking Brake P. 551

 

If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer immediately.
u Preventing the vehicle from moving, put the transmission into P.

If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

 

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.

Handling the Unexpected

 

655

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn on the power system again. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected

 

656

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.

u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

TPMS Calibration P. 494
What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible.
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

 

657

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message
Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message

Reasons for the indicator to blink The transmission is malfunctioning.
What to do when the indicator blinks
• Immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

1If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message

 

You may not be able to turn on the power system.

Make sure to set the parking brake when parking your vehicle.

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Emergency Towing P. 663
658

Fuses

Fuse Locations

If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type A
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box.

 

Tab

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

Amps

OP BLOCK 2

40 A

ESB

(40

A)

ABS/VSA FSR

40

A

1

R/M 1

30 A

IG MAIN 2

30 A

R/M 2

30 A

MAIN FUSE

150 A

EPS

70

A

IG MAIN 1

30 A

2

FUSE BOX OPTION

40 A

FUSE BOX 1

60 A

FRONT WIPER MOTOR

30 A

P-ACT

30

A

REAR DEFROSTER

40 A

(30

A)

3

FUSE BOX 2

40 A

ABS/VSA MOTOR

40 A

(40

A)

BLOWER MOTOR

40 A

POWER TAILGATE*

(40

A)

4

OP BLOCK 1*

(40

A)

AWD

(20 A)

IG HOLD 2

(20

A)

5

6

WASHER

15 A

Circuit Protected

Amps

7

IGP

15

A

8

FI SUB

15

A

9

STOP LIGHTS

10

A

10

IG HOLD 1

10 A

11

IGPS

7.5 A

12

FI ECU

10

A

13

PCU EWP

10 A

14

HAZARD

10 A

15

IG COIL

15

A

16

RFC COIL

5 A

17

FRONT DEICER*

(15

A)

18

BACK UP

10 A

19

AUDIO

15 A

20

AUDIO AMP*

(20 A)

21

22

SHUTTER GRILLE

10

A

23

A/C WATER PUMP

10 A

24

HORN

10 A

25

26

27

 

Handling the Unexpected

 

* Not available on all models Continued

659

FusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected

 

Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B
Located inside the driver side of the front bumper.

 

Holding Clips

Screw

Holding Clip

Turn the steering wheel to the right.
Remove the holding clips and screw, and pull the inner fender back.

Tab

 

Pull out the fuse box inside the inner fender, then push the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

PTC2

(40 A)

(20 A)

1

PTC4

(40 A)

EVTC

(20 A)

MAIN FAN

(40 A)

E/W PUMP

(30 A)

Tab

Pull the tab to remove the fuse box.
660

FusesuFuse Locations
Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard.

 

Fuse Label

Fuse Box

Fuse locations are shown on the label on the steering column lower cover.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

* Not available on all models

Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

1

ACCESSORY

10 A

2

ACC KEY LOCK

5 A

3

IG1 P-DRV

5 A

4

IG1 OPTION 2

5 A

5

IG1 OPTION

10

A

6

IG1 SRS 2

10

A

7

IG1 METER

10 A

8

IG1 FUEL PUMP

15 A

9

IG2 A/C

10

A

10

CTR ACCESSORY SOCKET

(20 A)

11

IG1 MONITOR

5 A

12

R SIDE DOOR LOCK

10 A

13

L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK

10 A

14

P/W RR L

20 A

15

P/W AS

20 A

16

DOOR LOCK

20 A

17

IG1 TCU

(10

A)

18

DR POWER LUMBAR*

(10 A)

19

MOONROOF*

(20 A)

20

IG1 STARTER

10

A

21

IG1 ACG

10 A

22

IG2 DAYTIME LIGHT

10

A

23

USB CHARGER*

(7.5 A)

24

+B OPTION

5 A

25

DR DOOR LOCK

(10 A)

Circuit Protected

Amps

26

R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK

10 A

27

P/W RR R

20 A

28

P/W DR

20 A

29

FR ACCESSORY SOCKET*

20 A

30

SMART

10 A

31

DR P/SEAT RECLINE*

(20

A)

32

FR HEATED SEAT*

(20

A)

33

DR P/SEAT SLIDE*

(20

A)

34

IG1 ABS/VSA

10

A

Handling

37

+B TRAILER

15

A

35

IG1 SRS

10

A

36

HAC OPTION

20 A

the

38

L SIDE DOOR LOCK

10 A

39

DR DOOR UNLOCK

(10 A)

Unexpected

a

PTG*

(20

A)

b

AS P/SEAT SLIDE*

(20

A)

c

AS P/SEAT RECLINE*

(20

A)

d

SUNSHADE*

(20

A)

e

IMA 1

10 A

f

RR HEATED SEAT*

(20

A)

g

HEATED STRG*

(10

A)

h

SBW

15 A

 

661

FusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected

 

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn

Blown Fuse headlights and all accessories off.

Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment.

u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

Combined

screwdriver to remove the screw and

replace it with a new one.

Fuse

Inspect the small fuses in the engine

Fuse Puller

compartment and the vehicle interior.

u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller and replace it with a new

one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.

Fuse Locations P. 659
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse box type A.

662

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Flatbed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the only way you can safely transport your vehicle.

Any other towing method will damage the vehicle’s drive system.

1Emergency Towing

 

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight.

Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

Handling the Unexpected

 

663

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate

What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the inside of the tailgate.

u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

1What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate

 

Following up:

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Cover

 

Models with power tailgate

Screwdriver

To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while pushing the lever to the right with the flat-tip screwdriver.
Lever

 

Models without power tailgate

Screwdriver

Lever

664

Refueling

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

1.

Turn off the power system.

2.

Pull on the fuel fill door release handle

under the lower left corner of the

dashboard.

u The fuel fill door opens.

3.

Take the funnel out of the tool case in the

cargo area.

2 Types of Tools P. 628

Funnel

4.

Place the end of the funnel on the lower

part of filler opening, then insert it slowly

and fully.

u Make sure that the end of the funnel

goes down along with the filler pipe.

5.

Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel

container.

u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6.

Remove the funnel from the filler neck.

u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it.

7.

Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

 

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Turn the power system off, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
NOTICE

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.

Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

Handling the Unexpected

 

665

This page intentionally left blank.

666

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.

Specifications ………………………………

668

Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers

Testing of Readiness Codes…………..

673

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

Warranty Coverages ……………………

675

Engine Number, Motor Number, and

Authorized Manuals…………………….

678

Transmission Number…………………

670

Customer Service Information………

679

Devices that Emit Radio Waves …….

671

Reporting Safety Defects ……………..

672

667

Specifications

Information

 

Vehicle Specifications
Model

CR-V

No. of Passengers:

Front

2

Rear

3

Total

5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Front)

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Rear)

doorjamb

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity

14.6

– 16.4 oz (415 – 465 g)

Lubricant Type

ND-OIL 11 (POE)

Quantity

7.32

– 8.24 cu-in (120 – 135 cm3)

Engine Specifications
Displacement

121.6 cu-in (1,993 cm3)

Spark Plugs

NGK

DILZKAR7D11S

Fuel
Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 14 US gal (53 L)

Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)

■ Light Bulbs

 

Headlights (Low Beam)

LED

Headlights (High Beam)

LED

Fog Lights*

LED

Front Turn Signal Lights

LED

Front Side Marker Lights

LED

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

LED

Side Turn Signal Lights

LED

(on Door Mirrors)*

Brake/Taillights

LED

Rear Side Marker Lights

LED

Rear Turn Signal Lights

LED

Back-Up Lights

16 W

Taillights

LED

High-Mount Brake Light

LED

Rear License Plate Light

LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights

8 W

Ceiling Light

8 W

Cargo Area Lights

5 W

Vanity Mirror Lights*

1.4 W

Front Door Inner

LED

Handle Lights*

Foot Lights*

LED

 

* Not available on all models
uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake Fluid

■ Engine Oil

■ Tire

Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Recommended

·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20

235/65R17 104H

■ Transmission Fluid

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Size*1

235/60R18 103H

Change

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

235/55R19 101H

Capacity

32 (220 [2.2])

*2

Specified

Honda ATF DW-1

Change including

4.0 US qt (3.8 L)

Capacity

Change

2.5 US qt (2.4 L)

filter

Regular

Front

35 (240 [2.4])*3

■ Engine Coolant

Pressure

33 (230 [2.3])*4

■ Rear Differential Fluid

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

30 (210 [2.1])*2

Rear

32 (220 [2.2])*3

Specified

Honda DPSF-II

Specified

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

33 (230 [2.3])*4

Ratio

50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

Change

1.32 US qt (1.247 L)

17 x 7 1/2J*2

Capacity

1.46 US gal (5.52 L)

Wheel Size Regular

18 x 7 1/2J*3

(change including the remaining 0.17 US gal

19 x 7 1/2J*4

(0.65 L) in the reserve tank)

*1: Original tire size is mentioned on the tire information label on

the driver’s doorjamb.

*2: Models with 17 inch wheel

*3: Models with 18 inch wheel

*4: Models with 19 inch wheel

Information

 

669

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission Number

 

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.

The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, motor number, and transmission number are shown as follows.

 

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission Number

 

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Information

 

Engine Number Vehicle Identification Number

Cover

Continuously Variable

Certification Label/

Transmission Number

Vehicle Identification Number

Motor Number

670

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Information

 

671

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Information

 

672

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

 

Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly.

The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the 12-volt battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without turning the power system on. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
Turn the power system on.
1Testing of Readiness Codes

 

The readiness codes are erased when the 12-volt battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Information

 

Continued 673

Emissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for 40 minutes.
Information

 

674

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Information

 

Continued 675

Warranty Coveragesu
Information

 

Replacement 12-Volt Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

676

uuWarranty Coveragesu

EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director,

Light-Duty Vehicle Center,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,

Attention: Warranty Claim

2000 Traverwood Drive,

Ann Arbor, MI 48105;

[email protected]

Information

 

677

Authorized Manuals

Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

Information

 

678

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Service

Mail Stop CHI-5

1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

 

When you call or write, please give us the following information:

Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission Number P. 670
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the problem
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Information

 

Continued 679

Customer Service Informationu
Information

 

Disclaimer of Pandora®
Requirements to access Pandora®

Latest version of the Pandora app installed on your Android, Blackberry, or iPhone.
Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http://www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone)
Connection to the internet via Wi-Fi or cellular data network.
Limitations

Access to Pandora requires an active internet connection
Ability to access Pandora through this system is subject to change without notice
Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying tracks, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at
http:// www.pandora.com

<http://www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.

Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply.
Pandora is only available in the United States.
680

Index

Numbers

12-volt Battery 615

Charging System Indicator 95, 652

Maintenance (Checking the 12-volt

Battery) 615

12-volt Battery Charging System

Indicator 95, 652

4WD 492

A

AAC 265, 321

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 557

Accessories and Modifications 624

Accessory Power Socket 229

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow 105, 517

Additives

Coolant 593

Engine Oil 588

Washer 597

Additives, Engine Oil 588

Adjusting

Armrest 217

Front Seats 208

Head Restraints 215

Mirrors 206

Rear Seats 212

Steering Wheel 205

Temperature 138

Adjusting the Sound ……………………

256, 294

Audio System……………………….

244, 251, 272

Agile Handling Assist ………………………….

491

Adjusting the Sound……………………

256, 294

Air Conditioning System (Climate Control

AM/FM Radio …………………………….

258, 301

System) …………………………………………….

235

Android AutoTM …………………………………

336

Changing the Mode …………………………..

238

Apple CarPlayTM…………………………………

333

Defrosting the Windshield and

Audio/Information Screen…………….

252, 273

Windows ………………………………………..

238

Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout ..

277

Dust and Pollen Filter ………………………….

618

Changing the Screen Interface …………….

291

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ……………….

238

Closing Apps…………………………………….

293

Sensor ……………………………………………..

241

Customizing the Meter……………………….

278

Synchronized Mode ……………………………

240

Display Setup …………………………….

257, 295

Using Automatic Climate Control …………

235

Error Messages………………………………….

340

Air Pressure …………………………………

607, 669

General Information …………………………..

345

Airbags ………………………………………………..

56

Home Screen…………………………………….

284

Advanced Airbags ……………………………….

62

HondaLink® …………………………………….

326

Airbag Care ………………………………………..

71

How to use Siri ® Eyes Free …………..

271, 332

Event Data Recorder ………………………………

0

iPod …………………………………………

260, 312

Front Airbags (SRS) ………………………………

59

Limitations for Manual Operation …………

296

Indicator ……………………………………….

68, 97

Menu Customize……………………………….

292

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ………………

69

MP3/WMA/AAC…………………………

265, 321

Sensors………………………………………………

56

Pandora® …………………………………

263, 319

Side Airbags ……………………………………….

64

Playing Bluetooth® Audio …………….

268, 324

Side Curtain Airbags …………………………….

66

Playing SiriusXM® Radio ……………………..

305

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ……………………….

492

Reactivating ……………………………………..

247

AM/FM Radio ………………………………

258, 301

Recommended Devices……………………….

346

Android AutoTM ………………………………….

336

Remote Controls ……………………………….

248

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………………

557

Security Code……………………………………

247

Indicator …………………………………………….

97

Selecting an Audio Source…………………..

296

Apple CarPlayTM ………………………………….

333

Song By VoiceTM (SBV) ………………………..

315

Armrest ……………………………………………..

217

Status Area ………………………………………

290

Audio Remote Controls……………………….

248

Index

681

Index

Theft Protection…………………………………

247

Beverage Holders ……………………………….

222

USB Flash Drives ………………….

265, 321, 346

Blind spot information System …………….

499

USB Port(s)………………………………………..

245

Indicator…………………………………………..

102

Voice Control Operation ……………………..

297

Bluetooth® Audio ………………………..

268, 324

Wallpaper Setup …………………………

254, 282

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ………..

398, 422

Wi-Fi Connection……………………………….

331

Booster Seats (For Children) ………………….

85

Audio/Information Screen…………….

252, 273

Brake System ……………………………………..

551

Authorized Manuals……………………………

678

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)……………….

557

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ……………..

166

Automatic Brake Hold ………………………..

555

Auto High-Beam …………………………………

195

Brake Assist System ……………………………

558

Indicator …………………………………………..

101

Fluid………………………………………………..

596

Automatic Brake Hold…………………………

555

Foot Brake………………………………………..

554

Indicator ……………………………………..

93, 555

Indicator……………………………………….

91, 92

Automatic Brake Hold System

Indicator (Red)……………………………

654, 655

Indicator …………………………………………….

93

Parking Brake ……………………………………

551

Automatic Intermittent Wipers ……………

199

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel)…. 202

Automatic Lighting …………………………….

191

Bulb Replacement ………………………………

598

Average Fuel Economy………………………..

130

Brake/Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights and

Average Fuel Economy Records……………

131

Rear Side Marker Lights …………………….

598

Average Speed……………………………………

130

Front Turn Signal/ Front Side Marker

AWD (All-Wheel Drive) ……………………….

492

Lights …………………………………………….

598

Headlights………………………………………..

598

B

High-Mount Brake Light ……………………..

600

Parking/Daytime Running Lights …………..

598

Battery…………………………………………………

12

Rear License Plate Light ………………………

600

Charging System Indicator …………………….

95

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator

High Voltage ……………………………….

12, 502

Lights …………………………………………….

598

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead ……………….

647

Taillights and Back-Up Lights ……………….

599

Maintenance (Replacing)……………………..

617

Bulb Specifications ……………………………..

668

Belts (Seat) …………………………………………..

47

C

Carbon Monoxide Gas 86

Cargo Hook 225

Carrying Cargo 461, 463

Certification Label 670

Changing Bulbs 598

Charging System Indicator 95, 652

Child Safety 72

Childproof Door Locks 165

Child Seat 72

Booster Seats 85

Child Seat for Infants 74

Child Seat for Small Children 75

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat

Belt 80

Larger Children 84

Rear-facing Child Seat 74

Selecting a Child Seat 76

Childproof Door Locks 165

Cleaning the Exterior 621

Cleaning the Interior 619

Climate Control System 235

Changing the Mode 235

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows 238

Dust and Pollen Filter 618

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode 238

Sensors 241

Synchronization Mode 240

Using Automatic Climate Control 235

682

Clock …………………………………………………

150

Defrosting the Windshield and

CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking

Windows ………………………………………….

238

SystemTM) …………………………………………

506

Detachable Anchor……………………………….

53

Coat Hook …………………………………………

224

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ……………

671

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

Dimming

(CMBSTM) ………………………………………….

506

Headlights ………………………………………..

190

Compass…………………………………………….

456

Rearview Mirror …………………………………

206

Continuously Variable Transmission

Dipstick (Engine Oil)……………………………

589

Creeping………………………………………….

476

Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ………….

189

Kickdown ………………………………………..

476

Display Setup ………………………………

257, 295

Controls …………………………………………….

149

Display/Information Button …………………

128

Coolant (Engine) ………………………………..

593

Door Mirrors ………………………………………

207

Adding to the Radiator ………………………

594

Doors …………………………………………………

152

Adding to the Reserve Tank ………………..

593

Auto Door Locking …………………………….

166

Overheating……………………………………..

649

Auto Door Unlocking………………………….

166

Creeping (Continuously Variable

Keys ………………………………………………..

152

Transmission)……………………………………

476

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from

Cross Traffic Monitor ………………………….

566

the Inside………………………………………..

163

Cup Holders……………………………………….

222

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from

Customer Service Information …………….

679

the Outside……………………………………..

155

Customized Features ……………

140, 362, 369

Lockout Prevention System ………………….

162

DOT Tire Quality Grading ……………………

609

D

Driver Information Interface ……………….

128

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support ………………

209

Daytime Running Lights ……………………..

194

Driving……………………………………………….

459

Deceleration Paddle Selector ………………

484

Braking…………………………………………….

551

Indicator ……………………………………………

95

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ……………

467

Defaulting All the Settings………………….

394

Shifting ……………………………………………

477

Deflation Warning System

Transmission……………………………………..

476

Indicator ……………………………………………

99

Driving Position Memory System………….

203

Dust and Pollen Filter ………………………….

618

E

Eco Assist® System 18

Eco Drive Display 19, 132

ECON Mode 487

Elapsed Time 130

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator 98, 656

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 489

Emergency 663

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) 673

Engine

Coolant 593

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead 647

Number 670

Oil 588

Switch Buzzer 187

Engine Coolant 593

Adding to the Radiator 594

Adding to the Reserve Tank 593

Overheating 649

Engine Oil 588

Adding 590

Checking 589

Displaying Oil Life 582

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 93, 652

Recommended Engine Oil 588

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

System 98, 656

EV Button 14

EV Indicator 94

EV Mode Indicator 94

Index

683

Index

Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 86

Exterior Care (Cleaning) 621

Exterior Mirrors 207

F

Features 243

Filters

Dust and Pollen 618

Oil 591

Flat Tire 629

Floor Mats 620

Fluids

Brake 596

Engine Coolant 593

Windshield Washer 597

FM/AM Radio 258, 301

Fog Light Indicator 101

Folding Down the Rear Seats 213

Foot Brake 554

Front Airbags (SRS) 59

Front Seats 208

Adjusting 208

Front Sensor Camera 548

Fuel 34, 572

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 575

Gauge 126

Instant Fuel Economy 130

Low Fuel Indicator 96

Range 130

Recommendation 572

Refueling 572

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 575

Fuel Fill Door 34, 573

Fuses 659

Inspecting and Changing 662

Locations 659, 660, 661

G

Gasoline (Fuel)

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 575

Information 572

Refueling 572

Gauges 126

Glass (care) 619, 622

Glove Box 220

H

Handling of the Jack 643

Handling the Unexpected 627

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) 398, 422

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and

Call History 412, 435

Caller’s ID Information 409

Displaying Messages 450

HFL Buttons 398, 422

HFL Menus 400, 425

HFL Status Display 399, 424

In Case of Emergency 454

Limitations for Manual Operation 399, 424

Making a Call 416, 443

Options During a Call 421, 447

Phone Setup 404, 430

Phonebook Phonetic Modification 439

Receiving a Call 420, 446

Receiving a Text/E-mail Message 448

Ring Tone 409, 434

Selecting a Text/E-mail Message

Account 449

Speed Dial 413, 436

To Clear the System 411

To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options .. 433

Hazard Warning Button 6

HD RadioTM 303

Head Restraints 215

Headlights 190

Aiming 598

Auto High-Beam 195

Automatic Operation 191

Dimming 190

Operating 190

Heated Door Mirror Button 201

Heated Steering Wheel 233

Heaters 234

HFL (HandsFreeLink®) 398, 422

High Beam Indicator 100

High Voltage Battery 502

Hill Start Assist System 474

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 395

Honda App License Agreement 347

Honda Sensing® 35, 503

684

HondaLink® 326

Hybrid Vehicle

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode

Drive) 11

I

Identification Numbers 670

Engine, Motor and Transmission 670

Vehicle Identification 670

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead 647

Illumination Control 202

Knob 202

Immobilizer System 178

Indicator 101

Indicators 90

12-volt Battery Charging System 95, 652

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 97

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow 105, 106, 518

Auto High-Beam 101

Automatic Brake Hold 93, 555

Automatic Brake Hold System 93

Blind spot information System 102

Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS) 107, 108

Deceleration Paddle Selector 95

ECON Mode 102, 487

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

System 98, 656

EV 94

EV Mode 94

Fog Light 101

High Beam 100

Immobilizer System 101

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 106

Lights On 101

Low Fuel 96

Low Oil Pressure 93, 652

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS 99, 497, 657

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 94, 653

Parking Brake and Brake System

(Amber) 92, 655

Parking Brake and Brake System

(Red) 91, 654, 655

Power System 93

READY 93

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) 103, 104

Seat Belt Reminder 49, 96

Security System Alarm 102

Shift Position 95

SPORT Mode 96, 483

Supplemental Restraint System 68, 97

System Message 100

Transmission System 95, 658

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning 100

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)

System 97, 489

VSA® OFF 98, 490

Information 667

Instrument Panel 89

Brightness Control 202

Interior Lights 218

Interior Rearview Mirror 206

iPod 260, 312

K

Key Number Tag 153

Keyless Access System 155

Keyless Lockout Prevention 162

Keys 152

Lockout Prevention 162

Master Keys 152

Number Tag 153

Rear Door Won’t Open 165

Remote Transmitter 160

Types and Functions 152

Kickdown (Continuously Variable

Transmission) 476

L

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 534

LATCH (Child Seats) 77, 82

Lights 190, 598

Auto High-Beam 195

Automatic 191

Bulb Replacement 598

Daytime Running Lights 194

Fog Lights 194

High Beam Indicator Light 100

Interior 218

Index

685

Index

Light Switches …………………………………..

190

Maintenance MinderTM ……………………….

581

Lights On Indicator …………………………….

101

Oil…………………………………………………..

589

Turn Signals………………………………………

189

Precautions ………………………………………

578

Load Limits …………………………………………

463

Radiator …………………………………………..

594

Locking/Unlocking ………………………………

152

Remote Transmitter……………………………

617

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ………………

166

Replacing Light Bulbs …………………………

598

Childproof Door Locks ………………………..

165

Safety………………………………………………

579

From Inside……………………………………….

163

Service Items …………………………………….

584

From Outside…………………………………….

155

Tires ………………………………………………..

606

Keys ………………………………………………..

152

Transmission Fluid ……………………………..

595

Using a Key ………………………………………

161

Under the Hood ………………………………..

586

Lockout Prevention System………………….

162

Maintenance Minder …………………..

131, 581

Low Battery Charge…………………………….

652

Malfunction Indicator Lamp…………..

94, 653

Low Fuel Indicator ………………………………..

96

Map Lights …………………………………………

219

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ……………..

93, 652

Maximum Load Limit ………………………….

463

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal

Meters, Gauges…………………………………..

126

Strength……………………………………………

154

Mirrors ………………………………………………

206

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator…………..

99

Adjusting …………………………………………

206

Lower Anchors ……………………………………..

77

Door ……………………………………………….

207

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)…………..

463

Exterior ……………………………………………

207

Lumbar Support………………………………….

209

Interior Rearview ……………………………….

206

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch …….

209

Modifications (and Accessories) …………..

624

Moonroof ………………………………………….

185

M

MP3 ……………………………………………

265, 321

Multi-View Rear Camera……………………..

570

Maintenance ………………………………………

577

12-volt Battery…………………………………..

615

N

Brake Fluid………………………………………..

596

Cleaning…………………………………………..

619

Navigation …………………………………………

139

Coolant ……………………………………………

593

Numbers (Identification)……………………..

670

O

Odometer 129

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 467

Oil (Engine) 588

Adding 590

Checking 589

Displaying Oil Life 582

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 93, 652

Recommended Engine Oil 588

Viscosity 588

Open Source Licenses 361

Opening/Closing

Hood 587

Moonroof 185

Power Windows 181

Tailgate 167

Outside Temperature Display 138

Overheating 649

P

Pandora® 263, 319

Panic Mode 180

Parking 559

Parking Brake 551

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

(Amber) 92, 655

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

(Red) 91, 654, 655

Parking Sensor System 561

686

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator……………..

69

Fuel Gauge ……………………………………….

126

Passing Indicators……………………………….

190

Gasoline ……………………………………

572, 668

Playing Bluetooth® Audio ……………

268, 324

Low Fuel Indicator ……………………………….

96

POWER Button …………………………………..

186

Regulations ………………………….

497, 609, 671

Power System

Remote Transmitter ……………………………

160

Won’t Start………………………………………

644

Replacement

Power System Indicator ………………………..

93

Battery …………………………………………….

617

Power Tailgate …………………………………..

170

Bulbs ……………………………………………….

598

Power Windows …………………………………

181

Front Wiper Blade Rubber……………………

601

POWER/CHARGE Gauge ……………………..

126

Fuses …………………………………

659, 660, 661

Precautions While Driving…………………..

475

Rear Wiper Blade Rubber …………………….

604

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility

Tires ………………………………………………..

612

Vehicle…………………………………………..

475

Reporting Safety Defects …………………….

672

Rain ………………………………………………..

475

Resetting a Trip Meter ………………………..

130

Pregnant Women…………………………………

54

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)

………. 543

Puncture (Tire) …………………………………..

629

On and Off ……………………………………….

545

R

S

Radiator…………………………………………….

594

Safe Driving …………………………………………

41

Radio (FM/AM) ……………………………

258, 301

Safety Check ………………………………………..

46

Radio (SiriusXM®)……………………………….

305

Safety Labels ………………………………………..

87

Radio Data System (RDS) ……………..

259, 304

Safety Message ………………………………………

2

RDS (Radio Data System) ……………..

259, 304

Seat Belts……………………………………………..

47

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)

…… 673

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ………………

52

READY Indicator ………………………………….

93

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners………………

50

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control

Checking ……………………………………………

55

SystemTM…………………………………………..

492

Detachable Anchor ………………………………

53

Rear Seats (Folding Down) ………………….

213

Fastening……………………………………………

51

Rearview Mirror …………………………………

206

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat

Refueling …………………………………………..

572

Belt………………………………………………….

80

Pregnant Women 54

Reminder 49

Warning Indicator 49, 96

Seat Heaters 234

Seats 208

Adjusting 208

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support 208

Front Seats 208

Heaters 234

Rear Seats 212

Seat Heaters 234

Security System 178

Immobilizer System Indicator 101

Security System Alarm Indicator 102

Select Button

Operation 32, 479

Selecting a Child Seat 76

Selector Knob (Audio) 251

Setting the Clock 150

Shift Button 32

Shift Button Positions

Transmission 32, 477

Shift Position Indicator 95, 479

Shoulder Anchor 52

Side Airbags 64

Side Curtain Airbags 66

Siri® Eyes Free 271, 332

SiriusXM® Radio 305

Snow Tires 614

Song By VoiceTM (SBV) 315

Spark Plugs 668

Index

687

Index

Specifications 668

Specified Fuel 572, 668

Speedometer 126

SPORT Mode

Indicator 96, 483

SRS Airbags (Airbags) 59

Starting the Engine

Engine Switch Buzzer 187

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead 647

Steering Wheel 205

Adjusting 205

Stopping 559

Summer Tires 614

Sunglasses Holder 226

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 59

Switches (Around the Steering

Wheel) 6, 7, 186

System Message Indicator 100

T

Tailgate 167

Unable to Open 664

Temperature

Outside Temperature Display 138

Temperature Sensor 138

Temporary Repair Kit (TRK) 629

Theft Protection 247

Time (Setting) 150

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) 493

Tires 606

Air Pressure 607, 669

Checking and Maintaining 606

Inspection 606

Labeling 607

Puncture (Flat Tire) 629

Regulations 609

Rotation 613

Summer 614

Temporary Repair Kit (TRK) 629

Tire Chains 614

Wear Indicators 611

Winter 614

Tonneau Cover 227

Tools 628

Towing a Trailer 465

Towing Behind a Motorhome 466

Towing Your Vehicle

Emergency 663

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System) 493

Transmission 476, 477

Number 670

Operating the Shift Button 479

Operation 32

Shift Position Indicator 95, 479

Shifting 477

Transmission System

Indicator 95, 658

TRIP Knob 129

Trip Meter 129

TRK (Temporary Repair Kit) 629

Troubleshooting 627

Blown Fuse 659, 660, 661

Brake Pedal Vibrates 38

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door 38

Emergency Towing 663

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead 647

Noise When Braking 39

Overheating 649

Power System Won’t Start 644

Puncture/Flat Tire 629

Rear Door Won’t Open 38, 165

Warning Indicators 90

Turn Signals 189

Turn signals

Indicators (Instrument Panel) 100

Turning on the Power

Does Not Activate 644

U

Unlocking the Doors 155

Unlocking the Front Doors from

the Inside 163

USB Flash Drives 265, 321, 346

USB Port(s) 245

V

Vanity Mirrors 9

Vehicle Identification Number 670

688

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) 489

Off Button 490

OFF Indicator 98

System Indicator 97

Viscosity (Oil) 588, 669

Voice Control Operation 297

Audio Commands 299

Climate Control Commands 300

General Commands 300

Music Search Commands 300

On Screen Commands 300

Phone Commands 299

Useful Commands 299

Voice Portal Screen 298

Voice Recognition 297

VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM) 489

W

Wallpaper 254, 282

Warning and Information Messages 109

Warning Indicator On/Blinking 652

Warning Labels 87

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately) 675

Watts 668

WAV 265, 321

Wear Indicators (Tire) 611

Wi-Fi Connection 331

Window Washers 198

Adding/Refilling Fluid 597

Switch 198

Windows (Opening and Closing) 181

Windshield 198

Cleaning 619, 622

Defrosting/Defogging 238

Washer Fluid 597

Wiper Blades 601

Wipers and Washers 198

Winter Tires 614

Snow Tires 614

Tire Chains 614

Wiper and Washer

Front 198

Wipers and Washers 198

Automatic Intermittent Wipers 199

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades 601

Rear 200

Wireless Charger 230

WMA 265, 321

Worn Tires 606

Index

689

 

owners.honda.com

31TPG620

2022 Honda CR-V Hybrid Owner’s Manual

OM-16953

00X31-TPG-6200

© 2021 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

 

Leave a Reply 0

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *


This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.